JP2014090766A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine enabling a player to see dynamic display of identification information to the end without losing interest.SOLUTION: When a variable performance results in a jackpot, a first accessory 87 is operated at arbitrary timing when the variable performance is in a ready-to-win state, and one-time notification for showing that the probability resulting in a jackpot is 100% is executed. After completion of the one-time notification, a third pattern display device 81 displays a performance selection image 81a for enabling a player to select a performance pattern (ready-to-win pattern) to be displayed hereafter. The player selects a ready-to-win type to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 from among three ready-to-win types displayed in the performance selection image 81a. A variable performance is executed by the selected ready-to-win type.

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  In recent years, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines perform various effects by, for example, displaying various images on a liquid crystal display device or operating a movable accessory (for example, Patent Document 1). ). As one of such effects, there is a notice effect that gives a notice during execution of the variable effect that the variable effect is surely won when the variable effect is displayed.

JP 2012-85862 A

  If such a notice effect is performed at an early stage after the start of the variable effect, the player knows that it will be a hit with the variable effect, so the effect will be performed during the remaining variable effect period. There was a risk that interest would be lost and interest in games would be lost.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that allows a player to watch the dynamic display of identification information without getting bored.

  In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to claim 1 has an acquisition means for acquiring random information triggered by the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and an operation of identification information based on the information acquired by the acquisition means. A mode selection unit that selects a mode of the automatic display, and a dynamic display execution unit that executes a dynamic display of the identification information based on the mode selected by the mode selection unit, and is executed by the dynamic display execution unit. When predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, a predetermined game value is given to the player, and the predetermined identification information is displayed in the dynamic display of the identification information. A decision to determine whether to activate a notifying means for notifying that the predetermined identification information appears during execution of dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display executing means, Means, A notification actuating means for actuating the notifying means during the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display executing means based on the fact that the notifying means is determined to be activated by the determining means; A change in which a mode of dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means is changed based on an operation of the operating means by a player after the notification means is operated by the notification operating means. Means.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein after the informing means is operated by the informing operation means, a time during which the dynamic display of the identification information can be executed in a changed manner. Of the modes in which the identification information can be dynamically displayed within the time calculated by the calculation unit and the calculation unit to calculate, in order from the mode in which the probability that the dynamic display of the identification information is performed in that mode is low, Selecting means for selecting a predetermined number of modes, wherein the changing means operates the identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means after the notification means is operated by the notification operating means. The mode of the target display is changed based on the operation of the operation means by the player from the predetermined number of modes selected by the selection means.

  According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, when the predetermined instruction condition is established, random information is acquired by the acquisition means, and the aspect of the dynamic display of the identification information is based on the acquired information. Selected by selecting means. Based on the mode selected by the mode selection means, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means. In the dynamic display of the identification information, when predetermined identification information appears, a predetermined game value is given to the player. In addition, when the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means, the predetermined identification information appears during execution of the dynamic display of the identification information. It is determined by the determining means whether to operate the notifying means for notifying that. When it is determined by the determining means that the notifying means is activated, the notifying means is operated by the notifying operating means during the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display executing means. As a result, during the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information by the operation of the notification means, the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, and a predetermined game value is given to the player. I can inform you. On the other hand, if it is found that the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information and the predetermined game value is given during execution of the dynamic display of the identification information, the player Expect to finish early on the dynamic display of information. However, generally, when predetermined identification information appears, dynamic display of identification information tends to be performed for a long time. On the other hand, after the notification means is operated by the notification operation means, the mode of dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means is changed based on the operation of the operation means by the player. Changed by means. Thereby, the aspect of the dynamic display of identification information can be changed to the aspect which a player desires. Therefore, even if the player is found to be given a predetermined game value as a result of the dynamic display of the identification information being executed, the player is bored with the dynamic display of the identification information. It has the effect of letting you see it until the end.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the first aspect, the following effect can be obtained. In other words, after the notifying means is operated by the notifying operation means, the time for which the dynamic display of the identification information can be executed in the changed mode is calculated by the calculating means. Among the modes in which the identification information can be dynamically displayed within the calculated time, a predetermined number of modes are selected by the selection unit in order from the mode in which the probability that the dynamic display of the identification information is performed in the mode is low. The Then, after the notifying means is operated by the notifying operation means, the dynamic display mode of the identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means is selected from the predetermined number of modes selected by the selecting means. Based on the operation of the operation means, the change means changes. This allows the player to select an aspect with a low probability of being executed as dynamic display of identification information. Therefore, by showing the player the dynamic display of the identification information in that mode, there is an effect that a special feeling can be tasted and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine when the 1st accessory descends. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine when the 2nd accessory goes up. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the display screen and effective line setting of a 3rd symbol display apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the various data stored in RAM in a main controller, (b) showed typically the various data stored in ROM in a main controller. It is a schematic diagram. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of the various counters of a main controller, various reservation ball storage areas, and various reservation ball execution areas. (A) is the figure which showed typically an example of the jackpot random number table, (b) is the figure which showed typically an example of the jackpot classification table, (c) is the variation pattern table for jackpots FIG. 6D is a diagram schematically showing an example of a deviation (normal) variation pattern table, and FIG. 9E is a diagram of a variation (probability) variation pattern table. FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the change production in a special reach. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an effect selection image. It is the figure which showed an example of the display data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the reach combination table typically. It is the figure which showed an example of the additional data table typically. It is the figure which showed an example of the drawing list typically. Fluctuation time T ₀ of the variation effect in which one notification is performed, time T ₁ from the start of the variation effect to the start of execution of the one notification, and remaining variation time T ₅ after the effect selection image is displayed FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the change start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main command determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the display command determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the command interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the V interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the reservation ball number command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the confirmation command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. Yes, (c) is a flowchart showing a demo command process executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the change pattern command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the stop type command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button operation command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed a part of display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed a part of display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the pending | holding image setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button operation process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the reach selection table typically. It is the flowchart which showed the stop type command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of the game system in 3rd Embodiment. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a server 500. FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of user data. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the log control processing performed by MPU in a server. It is the flowchart which showed the stop type command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed a part of display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button operation process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 42, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment.

  1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIGS. 2 and 3 are front views of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 2 shows a state where the first accessory 87 provided in the variable display device unit 80 of the pachinko machine 10 is lowered so as to cover a part of the upper side of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. 3 shows a state in which the second accessory 88 provided on the variable display device 80 of the pachinko machine 10 is lifted so as to cover a part of the lower side of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIGS. 2 and 3) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is performed when the ball flows down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 6) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shot that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is, for example, an effect for changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), which will be described later, or for causing the player to select an effect content (reach pattern) for reach. It is operated by the player when the player selects a reach pattern to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from the reach patterns displayed in the selected image.

  The stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 are made uniform, and an entrance to a first entrance 64 or a second entrance 640 (to be described later) Various effects such as a change effect and a reach effect that are performed along with the start / start prize are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage. For example, a “town stage” with a town motif, a “sea stage” with a sea motif, a “mountain stage” with a mountain motif, etc. are prepared as stages. The stage is changed, for example, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during high-speed fluctuation.

  Details of the effect selection image will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 having built-in light emitting means such as LED (Light Emitting Device). In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed, and the operation of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a, a push button-type stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 by a change in electric resistance (Not shown).

  When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the operation amount, and according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. Thus, the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. However, when the stop switch 51b is pressed, the ball is stopped from firing during the pressing operation. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of balls for nails and windmills, rails 61 and 62, a general prize. It is configured by assembling the mouth 63, the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the variable display unit 80, and the like, and its peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. It is done. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the game board 13 is fixed from the front side with a wood screw or the like.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area formed by dividing the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (a winning opening or the like is provided, Area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back so as to flow down on the right side (right side in FIG. 2) of the game area while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  A first symbol display device 37 is disposed in the upper right portion of the gaming area when viewed from the front (upper right portion of FIG. 2). The first symbol display device 37 is provided with a plurality of LEDs 37a which are light emitting means and a 7-segment display 37b. The first symbol display device 37 performs display according to each control performed by a main control device 110 (to be described later) that performs main control of the game, and mainly displays the game state of the pachinko machine 10. .

  The plurality of LEDs 37a indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of being probabilistically changing, operating in a short time, or in a normal state, indicating whether the pachinko machine 10 is changing or not by a lighting state, and the symbols corresponding to the probable big hit. Whether the symbol is a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot or an out-of-game symbol is indicated by a lighting state, or the number of reserved balls is indicated by a lighting state. The 7-segment display device 37b displays the number of rounds that are a big hit and an error display. In addition, LED37a is comprised so that the light emission color (for example, red, green, blue) of each LED may differ, The various game states of the pachinko machine 10 can be suggested with few LEDs by the combination of the light emission color.

  In addition, although mentioned later for details, in this pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed in response to having entered into the 1st entrance 64 and the 2nd entrance 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and also determines the type of the big hit if it is determined to be a big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but if it is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed.

  Here, “15R probability variation jackpot” is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds. “4R probability variation jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of four. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds and hits a short time during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

  In addition, the “high probability state” means a state in which the jackpot probability thereafter increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability change is in progress (probability change), in other words, a game that easily shifts to the special game state. It is a state of. The high probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and a ball is likely to enter the second entrance 640. The “low probability state” refers to a time when the probability of jackpot change is not occurring, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than that at the time of probability change. The short time state (short time) of the “low probability state” means that the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains as it is and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased. It means a game state in which a ball can easily enter 640. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state is a game state (a state where neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased) which is neither probabilistic nor short in time.

  As will be described in detail later, during probability change and time reduction, not only does the probability of hitting the second symbol increase, but also the time during which the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened is changed. A longer time is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (open state), a ball enters the second entrance 640 as compared with a case where the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (closed state). It becomes easy to sphere. Thus, during the probability change or during the short time, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second entrance 640, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  In addition, during the probability change or in the short time, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640a is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, It is good also as what changes the frequency | count that the electrically-driven accessory 640a opens rather than usual. In addition, the probability of winning the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or in the short time, and the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened and once. It is good also as what changes at least one of the frequency | count to do. In addition, during the probability change or in a short time, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is released per time are not changed. Only the hit probability may be changed so as to increase compared to the normal probability.

  On the left side of the game area as viewed from the front (left side in FIG. 2), there is provided a general winning opening 63 through which ten balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area.

  In the variable display device unit 80, the third symbol is synchronized with the variation display on the first symbol display device 37, triggered by the entrance to the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 (start winning prize). The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”), and the LED that variably displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of the sphere of the through gate 67. A second symbol display device 83 is provided. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 is provided with three movable accessories for a notice effect such as a first accessory 87, a second accessory 88, and a third accessory 89.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 (see FIG. 6) to be described later, for example, left, middle and right The three symbol rows are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these three symbols are scrolled vertically for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like that. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the display of the first symbol display device 37 is performed. The decorative display is performed accordingly. Instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 5, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated. FIG. 5 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and is an illustration of an actual display screen. FIG. 5 schematically shows the display screen area division setting and the effective line setting together.

  The third symbol is composed of ten kinds of main symbols with numbers from “0” to “9”. Each main symbol is composed of numbers from “0” to “9” on the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached symbols that imitate characters such as furoshiki, helmet, etc., almost full front of the wooden box, An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the big win lottery by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 6) described later is “big hit”, the variation effect in which the same main symbols are aligned is the third symbol display device. It is performed at 81, and is configured so that a jackpot is generated after the variation effect is finished. When shifting to a high-probability state (probability variation state) after the big hit, a variation effect is performed in which main symbols (also referred to as “high-probability symbol” and “probability variation symbol”) to which odd numbers are added are arranged. On the other hand, when transitioning to the low probability state after the jackpot, a variation effect is performed in which the main symbols (also referred to as “low probability symbols” and “normal symbols”) to which even numbers are added are arranged.

  The display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into three areas. One is a variable display area Dm, one is an effect display area Db, and the other is a hold display area Ds.

  The variation display area Dm is an area where a variation effect in which the third symbol is variably displayed is displayed. The variable display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each symbol row Z1 to Z3, main symbols are arranged in ascending order or descending order of numbers, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is scrolled from the top to the bottom with periodicity to perform variable display. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order. In the variable display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. Accordingly, a total of nine third symbols of 3 rows × 3 stages are displayed in the variable display area Dm.

  Here, the middle part of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is set as an effective line L1, and in each game (variation effect), the effective lines are in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2. The third symbol is stopped and displayed on L1. If the combination of jackpot symbols (the same main symbol combination in the present embodiment) is arranged on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, the jackpot effect is performed.

  The effect display area Db displays characters, character information, etc. on the back side or the front side of the third symbol, and displays a notice effect while the change effect is being performed in the change display area Dm. This is an area for displaying various effect images by displaying a jackpot effect.

  Here, the notice effect is an effect that suggests the degree of expectation that will be a big hit in the current fluctuating effect, so that the player can know the degree of expectation that will be a big hit according to the content of the image displayed in the notice effect It has become. In the present embodiment, as an aspect of the notice effect, the first accessory 87, the second accessory 88, and the third accessory 89 are operated and light-emitted while the movable accessories 87 to 89 are operated. An aspect is also prepared in which an image that emphasizes movement and light emission is displayed in the effect display area Db, thereby notifying the player of the expected degree of winning. The player can increase the expectation that is a big hit by viewing the notice effect executed during the change effect.

  The pachinko machine 10 is prepared from a variation effect with a short variation time to a variation effect with a long variation time, and the notice effect is configured to be executed more as the variation effect has a longer variation time. This is because if the variation time of the variation effect is long, the player may be bored until it is stopped and displayed, and the player is executed every time the announcement effect is displayed. Can have a sense of expectation for jackpots. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game for the player and continue playing the game.

  The holding display area Ds is an area for displaying the number of holding balls, which is the number of balls (holding balls) that have not been changed among the balls that have entered the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. Yes, it is divided into a first hold display area Ds1 and a second hold display area Ds2. In the first hold display area Ds1, the number of balls held for the ball that has entered the first entrance 64 is displayed. In the second reserved display area Ds2, the number of reserved balls for the ball that has entered the second entrance 640 is displayed.

  When a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 87), the number of times the ball enters is suspended up to four times. The The number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the first reserved display area Ds1. In addition, even when a ball enters the second entrance 640 while the variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 87), the number of entrances is a maximum of four times. The number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the second hold display area Ds2.

  In the first holding display area Ds1 and the second holding display area Ds2, one holding ball number symbol (“●” symbol) is displayed for each holding ball number, and the number of the holding ball number symbols is displayed. The number of balls on hold is displayed. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the first reserved display area Ds1, it indicates that the number of held balls for the first entrance 64 is one, and 4 in the second reserved display area Ds2. When the number of reserved balls is displayed, it indicates that the number of reserved balls for the second entrance 640 is four.

  In addition, when the number of reserved balls ("●" symbol) is not displayed in the first reserved display area Ds1 or the second reserved display area Ds2, the number of reserved balls for the corresponding entrance 64,640 is 0. It indicates that there is no reservation ball. The player can grasp the number of held balls that are held at that time from the number of held balls displayed in the held display area Ds.

  In place of the display of the number of reserved balls in the reserved display area Ds, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 and the number of reserved balls for the second entrance 640 are respectively included as part of the third symbol display device 81. It may be displayed in numbers. In addition, a certain area of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed in a different form (for example, color or lighting pattern) by the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64, and another region in the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. May be displayed in a different mode (for example, color or lighting pattern) by the number of reserved balls for the second entrance 640. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 87, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80, the game board 13, the door frame 12, or the like is provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. Four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls for the maximum number of holdings are provided, and the number of holding balls for the first entrance 64 and the holding ball for the second entrance 640 are determined according to the number of on-holding lamps. It is good also as what displays a number.

  Returning to FIG. 2 and FIG. 3, the description will be continued. The first accessory 87 is a disk-like movable accessory in a front view of the game area, and is used for a notice effect. The first accessory 87 is stored inside the upper side of the center frame 86 when the game area is viewed from the front during normal times, and is not visible to the player. And when the variation effect of the 3rd symbol currently performed in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 becomes a big hit, the 1st actor 87 is made into a center frame at arbitrary timings during the variation effect being performed. 86, and the game area is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front (in the direction of arrow A in FIG. 2), allowing the player to visually recognize the first action 87 that has been rotated, and the variation effect is 100%. A notice effect (so-called one-shot notice) is given to predict that the game will be a big hit with a probability.

  In addition, an LED (not shown) is built in the vicinity of the rotation center of the first accessory 87, and when the LED is turned on or blinked in conjunction with the rotation operation of the first accessory 87, the notice effect is provided. Is more emphasized. Further, in accordance with the operation of the first accessory 87, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is performed so that the brightness around the first accessory 87 becomes high. Thereby, the notice effect by the 1st actor 87 is further emphasized.

  A first accessory vertical movement solenoid 87a (see FIG. 6) and a first accessory rotation motor 87b (see FIG. 6) for operating the first accessory 87 are connected to the first accessory 87. The pachinko machine 10 drives the first action vertical solenoid 87a and the first action rotation motor 87b to lower the first action 87 from the center frame 86 while rotating, Perform a notice effect. The drive control of the first accessory vertical movement solenoid 87a and the first accessory rotation motor 87b is a sound to be described later for controlling sound output, lighting and turning off of the illumination units 29 to 33, the display lamp 34, and the like. This is performed by the lamp controller 112. Details of drive control of the first accessory vertical movement solenoid 87a and the first accessory rotation motor 87b will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The second accessory 88 (FIG. 3) is a plate-like movable accessory in the front view of the game area, and is used for the notice effect as with the first accessory 87. In the second accessory 88, the characters “Millionaire” are written on the front side in front view (side on which the player can see).

  The second accessory 88 is stored inside the lower side of the center frame 86 when the game area is viewed from the front during normal times, and is not visible to the player. Then, when the 3rd symbol variation effect is performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, the timing when it has been developed into a special reach with a very high expectation level that is a big hit, or once in the middle of the variation effect is temporarily dismissed. When the symbol is stopped and displayed, and then the reverse effect is performed again, the second effect 88 is raised from the center frame 86 for a predetermined time, thereby allowing the player to change to the second effect 88. A notice effect is made to visually recognize the characters of “Millionaire”. With the notice effect by the second actor 88, the player expects that the degree of expectation that is expected to become a jackpot by the development of special reach or the expectation that is expected to be a jackpot by the reverse effect is further increased. Suggests.

  The second accessory 88 is connected to a second accessory vertical movement solenoid 88a (see FIG. 6) for operating the second accessory 88, and the pachinko machine 10 includes the second accessory vertical movement solenoid. By driving 88a, the second accessory 88 is raised from the center frame 86, and a notice effect is performed. The drive control of the second accessory vertical movement solenoid 88a is performed by an audio lamp control device 112, which will be described later, in the same manner as the first accessory vertical movement solenoid 87a and the first accessory rotation motor 87b. Details of the drive control of the second accessory vertical movement solenoid 88a will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The third accessory 89 is a cylindrical movable accessory, and the character of “one-time reversal” is decorated on the side surface of the cylinder, and similarly to the first accessory 87 and the second accessory 88. , Used for notice production. The third accessory 89 is located on the right side of the front view of the third symbol display device 81 so that the cylindrical side surface can be viewed in front view of the game area, with the center axis of the cylinder shape up and down in front view of the game area. It is attached to the center frame 86 in parallel with the direction. Further, the third accessory 89 has a center frame 87 so as to rotate clockwise (in the direction of arrow B in FIG. 2) when the rotation axis is viewed from above the gaming machine with the central axis of the cylinder as the rotation axis. Is attached. Further, the third accessory 89 has an LED (not shown) built therein so that the letter “one-shot reversal” shines in one of blue, yellow and red.

  In the normal state, the third accessory 89 is maintained in a stopped state, and the characters “one-shot reversal” are also in a non-light-emitting state. Then, when the 3rd symbol display effect is performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, the timing at which the reach occurs, the timing at which the super-reach with a high expectation level which is a big win is developed, or the big hit than the super reach Rotate the third accessory 89 for a specified time while turning on or flashing “one-shot reversal” in blue, yellow, or red at a timing that has evolved into a highly anticipated special reach. And a notice effect is performed. This notice effect by the third actor 89 suggests to the player that the degree of expectation that is expected to be a big hit due to the occurrence of reach or the development to super reach or special reach is further increased.

  Also, depending on the color of the “one-shot reversal”, specifically, “one-shot reversal” light emission so as to increase the degree of expectation that will be a big hit in the order of blue → yellow → red The color is determined. As a result, the increase in the degree of expectation that is a big hit suggested to the player can be changed depending on the color of the character “one-shot reversal”. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the character color of “one-shot reversal”, and the interest in the game can be further enhanced by the color of the character. Therefore, the game can be continued without getting the player bored.

  A third accessory rotating motor 89a (see FIG. 6) for rotating the third accessory 89 is connected to the third accessory 89, and the pachinko machine 10 is used for rotating the third accessory 89. By driving the motor 89a, the third accessory 89 is rotated to perform a notice effect. The drive control of the third accessory rotating motor 89a is performed in the same manner as the first accessory up / down solenoid 87a, the first accessory rotating motor 87b, and the second accessory up / down solenoid 88a. 112. Details of the drive control of the third accessory rotating motor 88a will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Although details will be described later, whether or not the notice effect is performed using the first accessory 87, the second accessory 88, or the third accessory 89 is a display for controlling the display of the third symbol display device 81. The controller 114 determines. This is because the display control device 114 determines the detailed execution mode (variation pattern) of the variation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 including the notice effect, in other words, the display control. Depending on the detailed variation pattern determined by the device 114, it is determined whether or not to perform a notice effect using the first accessory 87, the second accessory 88, or the third accessory 89.

  In the display control device 114, when it is determined to perform a notice effect using the first accessory 87, the second accessory 88, or the third accessory 89, the first that is determined to be used in the notice effect The display control device 114 notifies the sound lamp control device 113 of this as an accessory operation start command including the operation mode of the accessory 87, the second accessory 88, or the third accessory 89. The sound lamp control device 113 follows the operation mode indicated by the accessory operation start command, the first accessory up / down solenoid 87a, the first accessory rotation motor 87b, the second accessory up / down solenoid 88a, the third operator. The first accessory 87, the second accessory 88, and the third accessory 89 are operated by driving the object rotating motor 89a.

  Each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which a symbol “◯” and a symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol) are alternately turned on for a predetermined time. Is. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the second symbol display device 83 stops and displays the symbol “◯” after the second symbol variation is displayed. Further, if the winning lottery results, the symbol of “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 after the variation of the second symbol is displayed.

  When the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the pachinko machine 10 has the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640. It is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined time.

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the shorter time than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and during the time reduction, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, the winning lottery can be performed more than during normal. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player many opportunities for the electric accessory 640a of the second entrance 640 to be opened. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the second entrance 640 during the probability change and during the time reduction.

  It should be noted that the second entrance 640 may be changed during the probability change or in a short time by other methods such as increasing the probability of hitting during the probability change or in the time reduction, or increasing the opening time or the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a per hit. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to enter the ball, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during probability change or short time, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, The opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 on the right side of the game area as viewed from the front, that is, on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 (right side in FIG. 2). Part of the sphere that flows down is configured to be able to pass. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery of the second symbol is performed.

  After the winning lottery, the second symbol display device 83 displays the variation. If the winning lottery results, the symbol “○” is displayed as the variation display stop symbol, and the winning lottery result is out. If there is, the symbol “x” is displayed as the symbol for stopping the variable display. The total number of passes through the through-gate 67 of the sphere is reserved up to a total of 4 times, and the variation display of the second pattern is performed for the number of the spheres that are reserved. The number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 described above.

  Note that the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in this embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol. Alternatively, a part of the display device 81 may be used. Further, the maximum number of balls held for passing through the ball of the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). In addition, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37. Separately from the first symbol display device 37, a second symbol hold lamp for displaying the number of reserved balls in the variable display of the second symbol is displayed for the maximum reserved amount. The number of reserved balls may be indicated by providing four and keeping the second symbol holding lamps lit for the number of reserved balls. Further, the number of reserved balls may be displayed on a 7-segment display or may be displayed in a predetermined area of the third symbol display device 83.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first entrance 64 into which a sphere can enter is disposed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. The main controller 110 performs a lottery lottery, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37 a of the first symbol display device 37. In the pachinko machine 10, a sphere (so-called “left-handed” sphere) launched so that the sphere passes through the left of the variable display device unit 80 with respect to the first entrance 64 is a variable display device unit. The ball is configured to enter more than the ball launched so that the ball passes the right side of 80 (the so-called “right-handed” ball).

  A second entrance 640 through which a ball can enter is disposed below the first entrance 64 in front view. When a ball enters the second entrance 640, a second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second entrance switch is turned on. The main controller 110 performs a lottery lottery, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37 a of the first symbol display device 37. In the pachinko machine 10, a sphere (so-called “right-handed” sphere) that is launched so that the sphere passes through the second entrance 640 to the right of the variable display device unit 80 is a variable display device unit. The ball is configured to enter more than the ball launched so that the ball passes through the left side of 80 (the so-called “left-handed” ball).

  Each of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 is one of the entrances through which three balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the second entrance 640 are calculated. Although configured in the same way, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the first entrance 64 is different from the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the second entrance 640, For example, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the first entrance 64 is three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the second entrance 640 is one. May be.

  The second entrance 640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 640a. The electric combination 640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric combination 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), and it is difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640. On the other hand, when the symbol “◯” is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state ( In an enlarged state), and the sphere easily enters the second entrance 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that during normal change during the probability change and the short time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. "Is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is opened (enlarged) is increased. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a also becomes longer than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second entrance 640 during the probability change and during the short time compared to the normal time.

  Here, although details will be described later, the probability of a big hit between the case where the ball enters the first entrance 64 and the case where the ball enters the second entrance 640 is a low probability state. Even if there is a high probability state, it is the same. However, the probability of the 15R probability variation jackpot that is most advantageous to the player as the type of jackpot that is selected when the jackpot is won is that the ball entering the second entrance 640 is the first entrance It is set higher than the case where a ball enters 64. On the other hand, the first entrance 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second entrance 640 and is in a state in which a ball can always enter.

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to enter the second entrance 640. The ball is fired (left-handed) so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 toward the ball entrance 64, and a lot of opportunities for lottery wins are obtained by entering the first entrance 64. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit. On the other hand, during the probability change or during the short time, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is likely to be in an open state, and is easy to enter the second entrance 640. Since the through gate 67 that triggers the lottery for the open state is arranged on the right side of the variable display device 80, the right side of the variable display device 80 is directed toward the through gate 67 and the second entrance 640. If the ball is fired so that the ball passes through (right-handed) and the electric accessory 640a is in an open state, the ball entering the second entrance 640 is aimed to become a 15R probability variation big hit, It is advantageous for the player.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment launches a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed between “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Thus, the player can be changed in the way the ball is hit, so that the game can be enjoyed.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed on the right side of the variable display device 80 and below the through gate 67, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. ing. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to entering the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 becomes a big win, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has passed, The LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be a stop symbol, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of a jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won). When a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, a specific winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and 15 balls are paid out as winning balls.

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open / close forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And. The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED 37a corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning opening A special gaming state is defined as a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball 65 is opened into the specific winning port 65a. You may make it form.

  In the left corner of the lower side of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate paper, an identification label or the like is provided, and the certificate paper or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small part of the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 640, 65a is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 66. A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (instruments) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 4, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated.

  In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 performs a jackpot lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, a lottery of a display result in the second symbol display device 83 (a second symbol winning lottery), and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The main control device 110 transmits commands for instructing various operations to a sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 via the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction. This is to prevent an illegal signal from being input to the main control device 110 via a signal line connecting the main control board 110 and the sub control board.

  Here, various data stored in the RAM 203 and the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7A is a schematic diagram schematically showing various data stored in the RAM 203, and FIG. 7B is a schematic diagram schematically showing various data stored in the ROM 202.

  As shown in FIG. 7A, the RAM 203 has a special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a special figure reserved ball execution area 203c, a special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, and a special figure 2 as shown in FIG. Reserved ball counter 203e, universal reserved ball counter 203f, universal reserved ball counter 203g, universal reserved ball counter 203h, universal reserved ball storage area 203i, universal reserved ball execution area 203j, special figure type flag At least 203k.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 7B, the ROM 202 has at least a jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot type table 202b, a jackpot variation pattern table 202c, and a release variation pattern table 202d.

  Further, in the main control device 110, the main winning features of the pachinko machine 10, such as the jackpot lottery, the display setting in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the display result lottery in the second symbol display device 83 are described. In order to execute processing, the RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 8) for storing various counters.

  Here, referring to FIGS. 8 and 9, various counters provided in RAM 203 of main controller 110, various tables 202 a to 202 d stored in ROM 202, and various storage balls stored in RAM 203 The areas 203a, 203b, 203i and the various reserved ball execution areas 203c, 203j will be described. First, FIG. 8 is a diagram showing an outline of various counters. These counters and the like are used for the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform jackpot lottery, display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, lottery of display results of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. Used in.

  For the jackpot lottery and display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, a first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and a first hit type counter C2 used for the selection of the jackpot symbol A stop pattern selection counter C3, a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection, and a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting an initial value of the first random number counter C1 are used. The second symbol random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 83, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second symbol random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 24). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The counter buffer is an area for storing the updated value of each counter, and the MPU 201 uses the value stored in the counter buffer at the counter update timing for each counter. Update.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first per-random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 899) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 899 for a counter that can take a value of 0 to 899). It is the composition which returns to. When the first random number counter C1 is updated once (when it is periodically updated from a certain initial value and then returned to the initial value in the next update), the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time Is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and the first random number counter C1 is updated from the newly read initial value.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 899, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 24).

  The value of the first per-random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process). Although details will be described later, the value of the first random number counter C1 at that time is provided in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning). The stored special figure 1 is stored in one of the first to fourth areas. In addition, at the timing when the ball wins the second entrance 640 (start winning), the value of the first per-random number counter C1 at that time is the special figure 2 reservation number provided in the special figure reservation ball storage area 203b. Stored in one of the first to fourth areas.

  The value of the random number that is a big hit is set by the big hit random number table 202a (FIG. 7B) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control unit. A first per-random number stored in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special figure second reserved ball storage area 203b at the timing when a ball is won (start winning prize) in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 When the value of the counter C1 matches the value of the random number that is a jackpot set by the jackpot random number table 202a (the jackpot random number value), the MPU 201 determines that it is a jackpot.

  Here, the details of the jackpot random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9A is a schematic diagram showing an example of the jackpot random number table 202a. The jackpot random number table 202a is divided into two types: a game state for a low probability state (a state in which the probability change is not in progress) and a high probability state (a state in which the probability change is in progress) having a higher probability of being a jackpot than the low probability state. The number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each is set differently. By differentiating the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpot is changed between the low probability state and the high probability state.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. In the first random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (big hit random value) that is a big hit in the low probability state is 3, and the big hit random value “7,307,582” is “low” in the “gaming state”. It is stored in the jackpot random number table 202a in association with the “probability state”.

  On the other hand, the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state is 30, and the jackpot random numbers “28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, 448 , 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892 are associated with the “high probability state” of the “gaming state” It is stored in the random number table 202a.

  In the present embodiment, in the jackpot random number table 202a, there is a duplicate value between the jackpot random number value associated with the “low probability state” and the jackpot random number value associated with the “high probability state”. Each jackpot random value is set so that it does not become. If there is a value that is a jackpot random value regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, the value is likely to be predicted from the outside, and there is a possibility that the possibility that the jackpot will be illegally assigned increases. As in this embodiment, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state or a low probability state), by changing the value of the random number that is a big hit, the value of the random number that is a big hit is predicted. Since it can be made difficult to be done, fraud can be suppressed.

  Returning to FIG. 8, the description will be continued. The first hit type counter C2 determines the big hit type when the big hit is reached, and is incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99), and the maximum value (for example, 0 to 99). In the case of a counter that can take a value, the counter returns to 0 after reaching 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process). Then, at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), the value of the first hit type counter C2 at that time is stored together with the value of the first hit random number counter C1 in the special figure 1 reserved ball stored in the RAM 203. It is stored in one of the reserved areas of the special figure 1 reserved first to fourth areas provided in the area 203a. Further, at the timing when the ball wins (start winning) at the second entrance 640, the value of the first hit type counter C2 at that time is stored in the special figure 2 reserved ball in the RAM 203 together with the value of the first hit random number counter C1. It is stored in one of the reserved areas of the special figure 2 reserved first to fourth areas provided in the area 203b.

  Here, one reserved area in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203b or the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203c (any one of the special figure 1 reserved first to fourth areas and the special figure 2 reserved first to fourth areas). If the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in () is not a random number that is a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that falls outside, the variation pattern in the variation effect or the type of stop symbol (hereinafter “stop type”) Will be the one at the time of detachment. On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in one reserved area in the special figure 1 reserved sphere storage area 203b or the special figure 2 reserved sphere storage area 203c is a random number that is a big hit, The fluctuation pattern and the stop type are those of the big hit. In this case, the variation pattern and stop type at the time of the jackpot are determined corresponding to the jackpot type indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area.

  The value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. The jackpot type is determined based on the first jackpot type counter C2 and the jackpot type table 202b (FIG. 7B) stored in the ROM 202. Here, the jackpot type table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9B is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the jackpot type table 202b. As shown in FIG. 9B, the jackpot type table 202b is a table in which the jackpot type is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2.

  As described above, as the jackpot type, as described above, the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after 15 rounds of jackpot, and the maximum number of rounds shifts to a low probability state after jackpot of 15 rounds. There are “15R normal jackpot”, which is a short-time state during the number of fluctuations, and “4R probable jackpot” in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after jackpot of 4 rounds.

  In the jackpot type table 202b, the correspondence between the jackpot type and the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 when the result of the jackpot lottery performed based on the winning at the first entrance 64 is a jackpot, and the second pitch The correspondence between the jackpot type and the value of the first hit type counter C2 when the jackpot lottery result based on the winning to the mouth 640 is a jackpot is separately defined.

  In the example of FIG. 9B, as a correspondence between the jackpot type and the value of the first hit type counter C2 when the jackpot lottery result based on the winning at the first entrance 64 is a jackpot, The jackpot type table for the “first entrance” is defined as follows. That is, the value “0-24” of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R probability variable big hit, the value “25-49” of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R normal big hit, The value “50 to 99” of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 4R probability variation big hit. That is, when a big hit is made in accordance with the winning at the first entrance 64, the jackpot type becomes a 15R probability variation big win with a probability of 1/4 (= 25/100), and 1/4 (= 25/100). ) With a probability of 15R, and a probability of 1/2 (= 50/100) with a probability of 4R.

  On the other hand, as the correspondence between the jackpot type and the value of the first hit type counter C2 when the result of the jackpot lottery performed based on the winning at the second entrance 640 is a jackpot, The jackpot type table is defined as follows. That is, the value “0-24” of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 4R probability variable big hit, the value “25-49” of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R normal big hit, The value “50 to 99” of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R probability variation big hit. In other words, when a big hit is made in accordance with the winning at the second entrance 640, the type of the big win is a 15R probability variation big win with a probability of 1/2 (= 50/100), and 1/4 (= 25/100). ) With a probability of 15R, and a probability of 1 / 4R (25/100) with a probability of 4R.

  In this way, the probability of a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot that is selected when a jackpot is won is that the ball enters the first slot 64 when the ball enters the second slot 640. It is set higher than the ball. On the other hand, as described above, the second entrance 640 is accompanied by the electric accessory 640a, and the ease of entering the ball into the second entrance 640 depends on the open / close state of the electric accessory 640a. On the other hand, the first entrance 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second entrance 640, and the ball can enter at any time.

  Also, the person who fired the sphere so that the sphere passed to the left of the variable display unit 80 (the person who left-handed) fired the sphere so that the sphere passed to the right of the variable display unit 80. It is configured so that the ball can easily enter the first entrance 64 rather than the case (than when the player strikes the right side). On the other hand, the sphere was fired so that the sphere passed through the right side of the variable display device unit 80 (the person who hit right) fired the sphere so that the sphere passed through the left side of the variable display device unit 80. It is configured to make it easier for a ball to enter the second entrance 640 than in the case (than when left-handed). In addition, a through gate 67 that triggers a lottery to open the electric accessory 640a is disposed on the right side of the variable display device 80. Normally, even if a ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric gate is electrically operated. While the accessory 640a is unlikely to be in the open state, the electric accessory 640a is likely to be in the open state when the ball passes through the through gate 67 during the probability change or in the short time.

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessory associated with the second entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to enter the second entrance 640, so the first entrance without the electric accessory The ball is fired (left-handed) so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display unit 80 toward the mouth 64, and a lot of chances for lottery wins are obtained by entering the first entrance 64. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit. On the other hand, during the probability change or during the short time, the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is likely to be in an open state and is easy to enter the second entrance 640. Toward the right side of the variable display device 80, the ball is fired so that the ball passes (right-handed), and the goal is to hit 15R probability variation by hitting the second entrance 640, It is advantageous for the player.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment launches a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed between “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Thus, the player can be changed in the way the ball is hit, so that the game can be enjoyed.

  Returning to FIG. 8, the description of the various counters will be continued. The stop pattern selection counter C3 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of detachment displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. 3 stoppages: “rear out of front / rear”, where the final stop symbol stops other than before / after the reach symbol, and “completely out” where no reach occurs. A production) pattern is selected.

  The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process). Then, at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 at that time together with the value of the first random number counter C1 and the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203 It is stored in one of the reserved areas of the special figure 1 reserved first to fourth areas provided in 203a. In addition, at the timing when the ball wins the second entrance 640 (start winning), the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 at that time together with the value of the first random number counter C1 and the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203 It is stored in any reserved area of the special figure 2 reserved first to fourth areas provided in 203b.

  One reserved area (one of special figure 1 reserved first to fourth areas, special figure 2 reserved first to fourth areas) in special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203b or special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203c If the stored value of the first random number counter C1 is not a big random number, the stop type is selected based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same holding area as the stop type at the time of departure. The

  Corresponding to the stop pattern selection counter C <b> 3, a plurality of tables (not shown) having different ranges of random number values to be selected for the stop type are provided in the ROM 202. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state or a low probability state.

  For example, in a high probability state, a table with a wide range of random values from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type “completely out” is selected so that a reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. It becomes easy to select “completely off”. In this table, the “front / rear detachment reach” is narrowed to 98,99 and the “reach other than front / rear detachment” is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select “rearward / rearward detachment reach” and “reach other than front / rear detachment”. If the probability is low, a table with a narrow range of random values from 0 to 79 corresponding to the stop type “completely out” is selected to secure the time for entering the first entrance 64. This makes it difficult to select “completely off”. In this table, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than front / rear deviation” is as wide as 80 to 97, and “reach other than front / rear deviation” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform a lot of reach display with a long production time, so it is possible to secure the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64 and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 is continued. It becomes easy to be done. In the latter table as well, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “front / rear out of reach” is set to 98,99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is a counter used for determining the variation pattern, and is configured to increment one by one within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process (see FIG. 24).

  Then, at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), the value of the variation type counter CS1 at that time together with the value of the first per-random number counter C1 is stored in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203. Is stored in any one of the reserved areas 1 to 4 in FIG. Further, at the timing when the ball wins (start winning) at the second entrance 640, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 at that time together with the value of the first random number counter C1 is displayed in the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. Is stored in one of the reserved areas of the special figure 2 reserved first to fourth areas.

  The MPU 201 determines variation patterns such as so-called normal reach, super reach, and special reach by using the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern tables 202bc and 203d (FIG. 7B) stored in the ROM 202. Specifically, the determination of the variation pattern is determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. The sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are based on the variation pattern (variation time) determined by the variation type counter CS1, and the third symbol reach type and detailed symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The variation mode is determined.

  The pachinko machine 10 is provided with a big hit variation pattern table 202c used at the time of big hit and a deviation variation pattern table 202d used at the time of loss as the fluctuation pattern tables. Further, as the variation pattern table 202d for detachment, the detachment (normal) variation pattern table 202d1 and the detachment depending on whether the gaming state is a low probability state during normal except for the shortage, or during the shortage or certain change. A use (probability change) variation pattern table 202d2 is prepared.

  Here, one reserved area in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203b or the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203c (any one of the special figure 1 reserved first to fourth areas and the special figure 2 reserved first to fourth areas). If the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in (1) is a random number that is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the same reserved area is obtained from the big hit fluctuation pattern table 202c. It is determined.

  Further, one reserved area in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203b or the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203c (any one of the special figure 1 reserved first to fourth areas and the special figure 2 reserved first to fourth areas). If the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in (1) is not a random number that is a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that falls outside, when the gaming state is in a normal low probability state except for a short time, A stop pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the same holding area as the first per-random number counter C1 is determined from the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d1, and the gaming state is in a short time or a certain probability variation. At this time, the stop pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the same holding area as the first random number counter C1 is a deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202. It is determined from the 2.

  FIG. 9C is a diagram schematically showing an example of the big hit variation pattern table 202 c stored in the ROM 202. The variation patterns selected in the case of the jackpot include various types of normal reach, various types of super reach, and various types of special reach. Among these variation patterns, the variation pattern (variation time) depends on the value of the variation type counter CS1. ) Is selected.

  Here, various types of reach reach are change patterns with a short change time of 15 seconds, and the first pattern (or the third pattern) is aligned after a short reach (so-called so-called bita stop pattern is aligned). . The various types of super reach are fluctuation patterns of 27-60 seconds, which are longer than those of normal reach types. 3 patterns). Special reach types are fluctuation patterns that have a fluctuation time of 90 to 127 seconds, which is longer than that of various types of super reach. This is a variation pattern in which the first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned after a special reach or the like.

  Note that “various reach” means that there are a lot of different contents in each reach. For example, in the super reach, a reach that changes the back image quickly and a certain character is displayed. There is a reach or the like that is displayed suddenly. In addition, there are a plurality of reach with different contents such as an addition of a notice effect before the start of change and an addition of an effect that becomes a big hit by re-change.

  As shown in FIG. 9 (c), in the jackpot variation pattern table 202c, the gaming state is normal, short-running, or short, like the variation pattern table 202d for losing (see FIGS. 9 (d) and (e)). The fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is different depending on the probability change.

  Specifically, when the gaming state is normal, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern (variation time). 15 seconds are associated, the variation type counter CS1 is associated with 51 to 179, and any one of the super-reach various variation times 27 to 60 seconds is associated, and the variation type counter CS1 is special with respect to 180 to 198. The reach is associated with any of the possible fluctuation times of 90 to 127 seconds. On the other hand, the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern (variation time) when the gaming state is short or probable. The variation type counter CS1 has various variation times of normal reach with respect to 0 to 149. 15 seconds are associated, and the variation type counter CS1 is associated with any of the variation times 27 to 60 seconds that can be taken by various types of super reach with respect to 150 to 198.

  In the big hit variation pattern table 202c shown in FIG. 9C, when the game state is normal, various types of super reach and special reach having a long variation time are easily selected as variation patterns. On the other hand, when the gaming state is short-running or probabilistic, various types of normal reach having a short variation time are easily selected as variation patterns.

  During normal times, since the probability of winning a big hit is low, various types of super reach and special reach that have a long variation time are selected as the variation pattern, so that the variation production by various types of super reach and special reach is performed. , It can greatly expand the player's expectation that will be a big hit. On the other hand, during a short time or during a certain change, the electric accessory 640a is likely to be in an open state, and a start winning is likely to occur at the second entrance 640. Therefore, if you select many variation patterns with a long variation time during a short time or certain change, it may take time to start the next variation production, giving the player a wait state, and may cause discomfort to the player There is. Moreover, even if it is a hall | hole, an operation rate falls and it is unpreferable. Therefore, when the gaming state is in a short time or a certain change, it is configured so that various types of normal reach having a shorter variation time than in the normal state can be easily selected, and the next variation display is started at an early stage. The possibility of causing discomfort to the person can be reduced. Moreover, it can suppress that an operation rate falls extremely.

  In addition, in the jackpot variation pattern table 202c shown in FIG. 9C, when the game state is in a short time or a certain variation, various special reach types are not selected. Although details will be described later, the special reach types are not selected in the case of losing. In other words, when a fluctuating effect is performed by special reach, it means 100% jackpot. Here, during the probability change, it is a gaming state that will surely be a big win for the player, so if the variable effect is performed by special reach during the probability change, the variable effect ends earlier than the joy that became a big hit As a result, there is a strong dissatisfaction with the desire to shift to a special gaming state (a jackpot state). In the pachinko machine 10, the fluctuating effect due to the special reach is not performed during the time reduction or the probability change, so that such dissatisfaction of the player can be avoided.

  In this pachinko machine 10, the game state is the same in the short-time and the probability change, and the correspondence between each variation pattern and the value of the variation type counter CS 1 is the same. The association between the pattern and the value of the variation type counter CS1 may be different. For example, the jackpot variation pattern table 202c may be defined so that various special reach types are selected as the variation pattern during a short time. During the time shortage, it is not necessarily guaranteed that it will be a big hit, so that the player can have a sense of expectation that will be a big hit by performing a variable effect by special reach.

  In addition, the variation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined using only the variation type counter CS1, but may be determined using a plurality of other variation type counters. For example, whether to add a notice effect for predicting the start of a jackpot or reach production before the start of the change or during the change effect may be determined by another variation type counter, or when the reach is established, It may be determined by another variation type counter how many symbols the first symbol (or the third symbol) to be stopped is shifted and stopped (for example, one symbol shifted before and after).

  FIG. 9D is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202 d 1 stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 9 (d), the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d1 is used only for complete disconnection, which is referred to when complete disengagement is determined as the stop type at the time of disengagement. It is divided into groups (groups) based on the reach common that is referenced when a reach other than is determined, and the stop type at the time of a break, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 corresponds to each of the divided groups It is attached. One reserved area (one of special figure 1 reserved first to fourth areas, special figure 2 reserved first to fourth areas) in special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203b or special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203c If the stored value of the first random number counter C1 is not a random number that is a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the range, the first is obtained when the gaming state is in a normal low probability state except for a short time. According to the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same hold area as the hit random number counter C1, the change pattern corresponding to the value of the change type counter CS1 stored in the hold area It is determined from the (normal) variation pattern table 202d1.

  Dedicated to complete detachment includes a short lapse in which the fluctuation ends in a short time (7 seconds) and the reach is not established, and a long lapse in which the fluctuation time (10 seconds) is longer than the short deviation but the reach is not established. The values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and these fluctuation times are associated with each other, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with 0 to 98, and the fluctuation time counter CS1 is associated with 99 to 198. Thus, an extra long fluctuation time of 10 seconds is associated. In addition, for reach, the reach is established, but the normal reach has a short variation time of 15 seconds, the super reach has a variation time 27 to 60 seconds longer than the normal reach, and the variation time is 90 times longer than the super reach. There are various special reach that is as long as ~ 127 seconds. The values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and these fluctuation times are associated with each other by the fluctuation type counter CS1 corresponding to 0 to 149 with various fluctuation times of 15 seconds of normal reach and the fluctuation type counter CS1 of 150 to 189. Is associated with any of the fluctuation times 27 to 60 seconds that can be taken by various types of super reach, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is any of the fluctuation times 90 to 127 seconds that can be taken of various types of special reach with respect to 190 to 198. It is associated.

  FIG. 9E is a diagram schematically showing an example of a deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d2 stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 9 (e), the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d2 is referred to when complete deviation is determined as the stop type at the time of separation, similar to the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d1. It is referred to when the reach is determined to be other than the full-removal reach and short-reach and long-reach, and the reach other than the front-rear and front-rear reach, and the common reach with various types of normal reach and various types of super-reach. It is divided into groups (groups) based on the stop type, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups.

  One reserved area (one of special figure 1 reserved first to fourth areas, special figure 2 reserved first to fourth areas) in special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203b or special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203c If the stored value of the first random number counter C1 is not a random number that is a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that falls outside, the same reserved area when the gaming state is in a short-time state or a high-probability state at the time of probability change In accordance with the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved area is extracted from the deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table 202d2. It is determined.

  As for the correspondence between the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation time for exclusive use of the complete deviation, the variation type counter CS1 is associated with 0 to 190 and the short variation time is 7 seconds, and the variation type counter CS1 is 191 to 198. Is associated with an extraordinary fluctuation time of 10 seconds. In addition, associating the value of the variation type counter CS1 with the variation time in the reach common, the variation type counter CS1 is associated with 0 to 190 with various variation times of 15 seconds of the normal reach, and the variation type counter CS1 is 191-1. 198 is associated with any of the possible fluctuation times of 27 to 60 seconds for various types of super reach.

  The off-set (probability change) variation pattern table 202d2 is a table that is referred to when the gaming state is in a short time or during the probability change, so that the electric accessory 640a is likely to be in an open state, and the start winning prize at the second entrance 640 is obtained. Is likely to occur. Therefore, if there is a lot of extraordinary time when the time is short or probable, it will take time to start the next fluctuation display, giving the player a wait state, and making the player uncomfortable There is sex. Moreover, even if it is a hall | hole, an operation rate falls and it is unpreferable. Therefore, when the gaming state is a short-time state or a high-probability state at the time of a probable change, it is configured so that a short deviation is more easily selected than in other cases, and the next variation display is started at an early stage. The possibility of causing discomfort to the person can be reduced. Moreover, it can suppress that an operation rate falls extremely.

  Also, in the out (normal) variation pattern table 202d1 and the out (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d2 that are referred to in the case of an outage, various types of special reach that can be selected as a variation pattern in the case of a big hit are not selected. As a result, when a fluctuating effect is performed by special reach, it is a 100% jackpot. Even in the case of jackpot, the special reach is selected as the variation pattern only when the gaming state is normal, and the probability of selection is also low at 10/199. Therefore, the special reach can be made to feel to the player as a special variation effect, and a great pleasure can be given to the player when the variation effect by the special reach is performed.

  The variation pattern at the time of detachment is selected using only the variation type counter CS1, but may be selected using a plurality of variation type counters together (selection of presence / absence of notice display, etc.). Further, the selection of the detachment type is configured to be divided into the detachment (normal) variation pattern table 202d1 and the detachment (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d2. However, even when the gaming state is normal, there are a plurality of holding balls. In the case of (for example, 3 or more if the maximum is 4), the change display may be terminated early, so that it may be selected with reference to the deviation (probability change) change pattern table 202d2. A variation pattern table for normal use or probability change corresponding to the number of reserved balls may be prepared.

  Further, in the variation pattern tables for outliers shown in FIG. 9 (d) and FIG. 9 (e), when short out and long out are simply out, and the out is selected, refer to other tables. Alternatively, it may be configured to select a short deviation and a long deviation with a predetermined probability. Of course, in this case as well, a table corresponding to the number of reserved balls may be prepared.

  Returning to FIG. 8, the description of the various counters will be continued. The second per-random number counter C4 is a counter used for the lottery of the variable display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83. For example, the second random number counter C4 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 250, for example. It is configured as a loop counter that returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250). In addition, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round (when it is periodically updated from a certain initial value and then returns to the initial value in the next update), the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time Is read as the initial value of the second per random number counter C4.

  In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18), and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, and is provided in the RAM 203. It is stored in any one of the first-fourth reserved-map areas in the reserved-ball storage area 203i.

  In the second random number counter C4, there are 149 random number values that the game state is normal, and the range is “5 to 153”. That is, when the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 153”, if the gaming state is normal, it is determined to be a win, and the second symbol display device 83 displays a stop symbol (first symbol). 2), the symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 640a of the second entrance 640 is opened for a predetermined time. In addition, the number of random number values that can be won when the gaming state is short or probable is 250, and the range is “1-250”. That is, when the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “1-250”, it is determined that the game state is in a short time or a certain change, and the second symbol display device 83 stops. As a symbol (second symbol), a symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 640a of the second entrance 640 is opened for a predetermined time longer than the normal time.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is set to be higher during probability change and shorter time than in normal time. Further, as described above, since the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is also shorter than normal, the symbol “◯” is easily displayed in the variation display of the second symbol, and the electric accessory 640a is in the open state ( The number of times (enlarged state) is increased. On the other hand, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened also becomes longer than normal. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second entrance 640 during the probability change and during the short time compared to the normal time.

  Here, as described above, the probability of a big hit between the case where the ball enters the first entrance 64 and the case where the ball enters the second entrance 640 is a low probability state. Although it is the same even in a high probability state, the probability that the 15R probability variation jackpot is selected as the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is large, the probability that the ball enters the second slot 640 is the first slot It is set higher than the case where a ball enters 64. On the other hand, the first entrance 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second entrance 640 and is in a state in which a ball can always enter.

  In addition, the ball is fired so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (the left-handed player) so that the ball passes through the right side of the variable display device unit 80. It is configured to make it easier for the ball to enter the first entrance 64 than in the case where the ball is hit (rightward). On the other hand, the sphere was fired so that the sphere passed through the right side of the variable display device unit 80 (the person who hit right) fired the sphere so that the sphere passed through the left side of the variable display device unit 80. It is configured to make it easier for a ball to enter the second entrance 640 than in the case (than when left-handed).

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessory associated with the second entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to enter the second entrance 640, so the first entrance without the electric accessory The ball is fired (left-handed) so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display unit 80 toward the mouth 64, and a lot of chances for lottery wins are obtained by entering the first entrance 64. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit. On the other hand, during the probability change or during the short time, the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is likely to be in an open state and is easy to enter the second entrance 640. Toward the right side of the variable display device 80, the ball is fired so that the ball passes (right-handed), and the goal is to hit 15R probability variation by hitting the second entrance 640, It is advantageous for the player.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment launches a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed between “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Thus, the player can be changed in the way the ball is hit, so that the game can be enjoyed.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and is updated once every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18). And repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 24).

  Now, in the RAM 203, a special figure 1 holding ball storage comprising four holding areas (special figure 1 holding first to fourth areas) in which each counter value is stored with respect to the ball entering the first ball inlet 63 is shown. An area 203a is provided. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b in which each counter value is stored with respect to the entrance to the second entrance 64. Although not shown, the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b also has four reserved areas (special figure 2 reserved first to fourth areas), similar to the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. .

  Each reserved area provided in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a includes a first per-random number counter C1 and a first per-type counter C2 acquired from the counter buffer by entering the first entrance 64. First per random number counter storage area 203a1, first per type counter storage area 203a2, variation pattern selection counter storage area 203a3, variation type counter storage area 203a4 for storing the values of the pattern selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1, respectively. have. Although not shown, each reserved area provided in the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b has a first random number obtained from the counter buffer by entering the second entrance 640. Storage areas for storing the values of the counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 are provided for each counter.

  In the special figure 1 holding ball storage area 203a, a first per-random number counter C1, a first per-type counter C2, and a stop pattern selection acquired from the counter buffer in accordance with the timing of entering the first entrance 64. Each value of the counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 is stored. At this time, if there is no reservation in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and all of the special figure 1 reserved first to fourth areas are vacant areas, each counter is stored in the special figure 1 reserved first area. Stores the value. If there is only one hold in the special figure 1 holding ball storage area 203a and the value of each counter is stored only in the special figure 1 hold first area, the value of each counter is stored in the special figure 1 hold second area. Store.

  When there are two holds in the special figure 1 holding ball storage area 203a and the values of the respective counters are stored in the special figure 1 holding first and second areas, each counter is stored in the special figure 1 holding third area. Stores a value. When there are three holds in the special figure 1 holding ball storage area 203a and the values of the respective counters are stored in the special figure 1 holding first to third areas, each counter is stored in the special figure 1 holding fourth area. Stores a value. Thereby, the value of each counter acquired from the counter buffer at the timing of the start winning prize in the order of the start winning to the first entrance 64, the special figure 1 hold first area, the special figure 1 hold second It is possible to store in the order of area, special figure 1 reserved third area, special figure 1 reserved fourth area.

  On the other hand, in the special figure 2 holding ball storage area 203b, the first per-random number counter C1 and the first per-type counter C2 acquired from the counter buffer in accordance with the timing of entering the second entrance 640, the stop Each value of the pattern selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 is stored. Which of the reserved areas of the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b (special figure 2 reserved first to fourth areas) is stored in the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Based on the number, it is determined by the same method as in the case of the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Thereby, the value of each counter acquired from the counter buffer at the timing of the start winning prize in the order of the start winning to the second entrance 640, the special figure 2 hold first area, the special figure 2 hold second The area, the special figure 2 reserved third area, and the special figure 2 reserved fourth area can be stored in this order.

  In addition, when the start winning to the 1st entrance 64 is detected when the value of each counter is stored in all of the 1st to 4th reserved areas in FIG. 1, the value of each counter at that time is detected. Is discarded without being suspended. Similarly, if the start winning to the second entrance 640 is detected when the value of each counter is stored in all of the special figure 2 holding first to fourth areas, The value is discarded without being held. In other words, in this embodiment, each of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 is configured such that the value of each counter can be held up to four start winnings.

  The RAM 203 is also provided with a special figure holding ball execution area 203c. When there is a hold in the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b at the start timing of the variation effect, the first per random number counter stored in the special figure 2 hold first area of the special figure 2 hold ball storage area 203b. The values of C1, first hit type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and stop type counter CS1 are respectively the first per random number counter storage area 203c1 provided in the special figure holding ball execution area 203c, the first hit type It is moved to the counter storage area 203c2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3, and the variation type counter storage area 203c4.

  If there is no reservation in the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b and there is a reservation in the special figure 1 reservation ball storage area 203a, the special figure 1 reservation ball storage area 203a has a special figure 1 reservation first area. The first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the stop type counter CS1 stored therein are respectively set to the first per-random number counter provided in the special figure holding ball execution area 203c. It is moved to the storage area 203c1, the first hit type counter storage area 203c2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3, and the variation type counter storage area 203c4.

  Then, the value of each counter stored in the first per random number counter storage area 203c1, the first per type counter storage area 203c2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3, and the variation type counter storage area 203c4 of the special figure holding ball execution area 203c. Based on the above, a jackpot lottery, a variation pattern of variation effect, and a type of stop symbol are determined.

  In the first symbol display device 37, a variation effect is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type. The change pattern and stop type determined here are notified to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the change pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variation effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

  Thus, if there is a hold in the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, each counter stored in the special figure 2 hold ball storage area 203b regardless of whether there is a hold in the special figure 1 hold ball storage area 203a. Value is transferred to the special figure reservation ball execution area 203c, and based on the value of each counter stored in the special figure reservation ball execution area 203c, determination of the big win lottery, the variation pattern of the variation effect and the type of the stop symbol Is done. Therefore, in the present pachinko machine 10, the start winning at the second entrance 640 is prioritized over the start winning at the first entrance 64, and a lottery effect is performed based on the jackpot lottery. It is configured as follows.

  In addition, the value of each counter of the special figure 1 reservation 1st area of the special figure 1 reservation ball storage area 203a, or the value of each counter of the special figure 2 reservation ball 1st area of the special figure 2 reservation ball storage area 203b, After moving to the special figure holding ball execution area 203c, the value of each counter stored in the special figure 1 holding second area or the special figure 2 holding second area is changed to a free special figure 1 holding first area or special figure. 2 is shifted to the reserved first area. Then, the value of each counter stored in the special figure 1 reserved third area or the special figure 2 reserved third area is shifted to the free special figure 1 reserved second area or the special figure 2 reserved second area. The value of each counter stored in the reserved fourth area or the special figure 2 reserved fourth area is shifted to the free special figure 1 reserved third area or the special figure 2 reserved third area.

  As a result, when the fluctuating effect is started based on the value of each counter held in the special figure 2 holding ball storage area 203b, the holding by the second entrance 640 is reduced by one, and the special figure 2 holding ball is saved. One area of the storage area 203b is released. Further, when the fluctuating effect is started based on the value of each counter held in the special figure 1 holding ball storage area 203a, the holding by the first entrance 64 is reduced by one, and the special figure 1 holding ball is stored. One area 203a is opened.

  The pachinko machine 10 is configured such that each data in the reserved area (second to fourth) is shifted to an area having a smaller area number regardless of the presence or absence of data in each reserved area. Data may be shifted only for a reserved area in which (variable counter values) are stored (held). For example, the number of fluctuating effects (the number of reserved balls) held in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a before the data shift is 2, and the special figure 1 reserved first area and the special figure 1 reserved second area. If only the data is stored, the data in the special figure 1 holding first area is shifted to the special figure holding ball execution area 203c, and then the data in the special figure 1 holding second area is transferred to the special figure 1 holding first area. The shift process may be terminated by shifting to one area. As a result, the data shift process is not performed for the reserved area where the data is not stored (held) (in the above example, the special figure 1 reserved third to fourth areas), so the number of data shifts is reduced. And control burden can be reduced.

  The RAM 203 is also provided with a universal reserved ball storage area 203i comprising four reserved areas (normal map reserved first to fourth areas) in which each counter value is stored for the passage of a ball in the through gate 67. ing. Each holding area has a second per-random number counter storage area 203i1 for storing the value of the second per-random number counter C4 acquired from the counter buffer by the passage of the sphere in the through gate 67.

  The ordinary reserved ball storage area 203i stores a second per-random number counter C4 acquired from the counter buffer in accordance with the passing timing of the ball in the through gate 67. At this time, when there is no reservation in the general-purpose reserved ball storage area 203i and all of the general-purpose reserved first to fourth areas are vacant areas, the second random number counter C2 is stored in the general-purpose first reserved area. The value of is stored. If there is only one hold in the general-purpose reserved ball storage area 203a, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is stored only in the general-purpose reserved first area, the second random number in the general-purpose reserved second area Stores the value of the counter C4. If there are two holds in the general-purpose reserved ball storage area 203i, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in the general-purpose reserved first to second areas, the second figure is stored in the general-purpose reserved third area. Stores the value of the hit random number counter C4. If there are three holds in the general-purpose reserved ball storage area 203a and the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is stored in the general-purpose reserved first to third areas, the second reserved area in the general-purpose reserved fourth area Stores the value of the hit random number counter C4.

  As a result, in the order in which the passage of the sphere is detected in the through gate 67, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 acquired from the counter buffer at the passage timing of the sphere is changed to the ordinary figure holding first area and the ordinary figure holding second. It is possible to store in the order of the area, the general map hold third area, and the general map hold fourth area. If the passing of a sphere is detected in the through gate 67 when the value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in all of the first-to-fourth reserved areas, the second hit at that time is detected. The value of the random number counter C4 is discarded without being held.

  The RAM 203 is also provided with an ordinary reserved ball execution area 203j. At the start timing of the variable display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol), if there is a hold in the general-purpose reserved ball storage area 203i, it is stored in the general-purpose hold first area of the general-purpose reserved ball storage area 203i. Each value of the second per-random number counter C4 is moved to the second per-random number counter storage area 203j1 provided in the ordinary reserved ball execution area 203j. Then, based on the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the second per-random number counter storage area 203j1 of the general-purpose reserved ball execution area 203j, a winning lottery of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is performed.

  Note that when the value of the second per-random number counter C4 in the first reserved area of the reserved figure in the ordinary figure holding ball storage area 203i is moved to the ordinary reserved ball execution area 203j, it is then stored in the second reserved area in the reserved figure. In addition, the value of the second random number counter C4 is shifted to the vacant ordinary reservation first area. Then, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the general-purpose hold third area is shifted to the free general-purpose hold second area, and the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the general-purpose hold fourth area The value is shifted to the third area where the figure is reserved.

  As a result, when the variation display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is started based on the value of the second per-random number counter C4 reserved in the universal symbol holding ball storage area 203i, only one ordinary symbol is retained. One area of the ordinary reserved ball storage area 203i is released.

  In this pachinko machine 10, when data shift processing is performed between each reserved area (general reserved first to fourth areas) of the general-purpose reserved ball storage area 203i, whether or not there is data in each reserved area. However, each data in the reserved area (secondary area to fourth area) is shifted to an area with a smaller area number. However, as in the case of the special figure, the data (values of various counters) ) May be shifted only for the reserved area in which is stored (held). For example, the number of fluctuating effects (the number of reserved balls) held in the general-purpose reserved ball storage area 203i before the data shift is 2, and only in the general-purpose reserved first area and the general-purpose reserved second area. If the data is stored, the data of the general map hold first area is shifted to the general map hold ball execution area 203j, and then the data of the general map hold second area is shifted to the general map hold first area. The shift process may be terminated. As a result, the data shift process is not performed in the reserved area where the data is not stored (held) (in the above example, the customary reserved third to fourth areas), so the number of data shifts can be reduced. And control burden can be reduced.

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the big win lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 7, the description of the RAM 203 is continued. The special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d enters the first entrance 64 detected in a timer interruption process (see FIG. 18) periodically executed every 2 milliseconds (start winning prize). Is a counter that counts up to four times the number of reserved balls (the number of standby times) of the variation effect (variation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81) performed on the first symbol display device 37. In addition, the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is based on the first symbol display device based on the entrance (start winning) to the second entrance 640 detected in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 18). 37 is a counter that counts up to four times the number of reserved balls (the number of standby times) of the variation effect performed at 37 (the variation effect performed at the third symbol display device 81). The special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e are set to zero as initial values by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after power-on (S1613 in FIG. 23). Then, each time a start winning is detected and the number of spheres with a variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4, respectively. On the other hand, the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203a and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203b are decremented by 1 every time the changing effect is executed.

  As for the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (that is, the number of reserved balls), each counter value is stored in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a based on the ball entering the first entrance 64. In the case, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by a special figure 1 reserved ball number command output from the main control board. The special figure 1 reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time a start winning is detected and the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is incremented by one. .

  The value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (that is, the number of reserved balls) is stored in the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b based on the ball entering the second entrance 640. In the case, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by a special figure 2 reserved ball number command output from the main control board. The special figure 2 reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time a winning prize is detected and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is incremented by one. .

  The voice lamp control device 113 uses the special figure 1 reserved ball number command and the special figure 2 reserved ball number command to hold the ball with a variable effect accompanying the start winning to the first entrance 64 held in the main controller 110. It is possible to acquire the number and the value of the number of reserved balls of the variation effect accompanying the start winning to the second entrance 640 itself. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can manage the number of reserved balls of the fluctuating effect without accessing the main control device 110 (see FIG. 10A, the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special figure 2). (See the reserved ball number counter 223b). In addition, each time a start winning is detected, a reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, so that the number of held balls of the fluctuating effect managed in the voice lamp control device 113 becomes noise. Even if there is a deviation from the actual number of reserved balls of the fluctuating effect held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of the above, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number of held balls command.

  It should be noted that the number of reserved balls in the changing effect accompanying the start winning to the first entrance 64 managed in the voice lamp control device 113 (see Fig. 1 reserved ball number counter 223a), and the second entrance 640. The number of reserved balls (figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b) associated with the start winning of the voice lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, and is based on the variation pattern command. And updated at the timing of setting the variation effect mode in the third symbol display device 81 (that is, the timing of starting the variation effect). That is, if the starting variation effect is accompanied by a start winning at the first entrance 64, the number of reserved balls of the variation effect accompanying the starting winning at the first entrance 64 is reduced by one and starting variation. If the effect is associated with the start winning at the second entrance 640, the number of reserved balls of the variation effect accompanying the start winning at the second entrance 640 is reduced by one.

  The main controller 110 determines whether the variation effect indicated by the variation pattern command in the variation pattern command transmitted to the sound lamp controller 113 is associated with the start winning at the first entrance 64, Information indicating whether the start entry to the second entrance 640 is included is included. In the sound lamp control device 113, based on the information included in the variation pattern command, whether the variation effect to be started is accompanied by the start winning at the first entrance 64, or the start to the second entrance 640 Based on the result of the determination, the number of reserved balls in the changing production accompanying the start winning to the first entrance 64 and the change accompanying the starting winning to the second entrance 640 are determined. A process of reducing one of the number of reserved balls for production by 1 is performed.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 changes the hold after the change every time the number of reserved balls in the fluctuating effect (the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a) accompanying the start winning at the first entrance 64 changes. A display special figure 1 reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of balls is transmitted. The display control device 114 displays the number of reserved balls for the number of reserved balls notified by the display special figure 1 reserved ball number command in the first reserved display area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, in the first hold display area Ds1, the number of variable displays (the number of held balls) held by the start winning to the first entrance 64 is shown to the player.

  Also, the sound lamp control device 113 changes the hold after the change every time the number of reserved balls in the fluctuating effect (the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b) associated with the start winning at the second entrance 640 changes. A display special figure 2 reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of balls is transmitted. The display control device 114 displays the number of reserved balls for the number of reserved balls notified by the display special figure 2 reserved ball number command in the second reserved display area Ds2 of the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, in the second hold display area Ds2, the number of variable displays (the number of held balls) held by the start winning to the second entrance 640 is shown to the player.

  The special symbol type flag 203k indicates whether the variation effect of the first symbol (the third symbol), which is a special symbol, is executed in accordance with the start winning at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance. It is a flag indicating whether it is executed in accordance with the start winning to 640. When the special figure type flag 203k is off, it indicates that the variation effect of the first symbol (the third symbol) is executed with the start winning to the first entrance 64, and the special symbol type When the flag 203k is on, it indicates that the variation effect of the first symbol (the third symbol) is executed in accordance with the start winning at the second entrance 640.

  This special figure type flag 203k is set to off or on at the beginning of setting the start of the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol). Specifically, when the execution timing of the variation effect of the first symbol (the third symbol) is reached, the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0, and the start to the second entrance 640 is started. If the values of the various counters acquired with winning are held in the special figure 2 holding ball storage area 203b, the various counters stored in the special figure 2 holding first area of the special figure 2 holding ball storage area 203b. Is shifted to the special figure holding ball execution area 203c, and the special figure type flag 203k is set to ON (see S1304 to S1307 in FIG. 20).

  In addition, when the execution timing of the change effect of the first symbol (the third symbol) is reached, the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0, whereas the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is If the value of various counters that are greater than 0 and acquired with the start winning at the first entrance 64 are held in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, The values of various counters stored in the special figure 1 holding first area are shifted to the special figure holding ball execution area 203c, and the special figure type flag 203k is set to OFF (see S1304 and S1309 to S1312 in FIG. 20). ).

  In the MPU 201, when it is determined that the jackpot lottery is performed by the jackpot lottery performed at the start timing of execution of the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol), as a jackpot type table (see FIG. 9B) used for determining the jackpot type. Based on the figure type flag 203k, either “first entrance” or “second entrance” is set. Specifically, when the special figure type flag 203k is off, the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol) determined to be a big win is executed in accordance with the start winning at the first entrance 64. Therefore, a jackpot type table for “first entrance” is set. On the other hand, when the special figure type flag 203k is on, the variation effect of the first symbol (the third symbol) determined to be a big hit is executed in accordance with the start winning at the second entrance 640. , The jackpot type table for “second entrance” is set.

  As described above, the jackpot type in the case of winning the jackpot with the winning at the first entrance 64 is 15R probability variation jackpot with a probability of 1/4 (= 25/100), and 1/4 (= 25/100). ) With a probability of 15R, and a probability of 1/2 (= 50/100) with a probability of 4R. In addition, the jackpot type in the case of winning the jackpot with winning the second entrance 640 is 15R probability variation jackpot with a probability of 1/2 (= 50/100), and 1/4 (= 25/100). The probability is 15R normal jackpot, and the probability of 1/4 (= 25/100) is 4R probability variable jackpot. In other words, the probability of a 15R probability variable jackpot as the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won is that the ball enters the first slot 64 when the ball enters the second slot 640. It is set higher than the case.

  Here, the second entrance 640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 640a, and the ease of entering the ball into the second entrance 640 changes according to the open / close state of the electric accessory 640a. On the other hand, the 1st entrance 64 does not have an electric accessory which exists in the 2nd entrance 640, and is in the state where a sphere can always enter.

  Also, the person who fired the sphere so that the sphere passed to the left of the variable display unit 80 (the person who left-handed) fired the sphere so that the sphere passed to the right of the variable display unit 80. It is configured so that the ball can easily enter the first entrance 64 rather than the case (than when the player strikes the right side). On the other hand, the sphere was fired so that the sphere passed through the right side of the variable display device unit 80 (the person who hit right) fired the sphere so that the sphere passed through the left side of the variable display device unit 80. It is configured to make it easier for a ball to enter the second entrance 640 than in the case (than when left-handed).

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessory associated with the second entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to enter the second entrance 640, so the first entrance without the electric accessory The ball is fired (left-handed) so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display unit 80 toward the mouth 64, and a lot of chances for lottery wins are obtained by entering the first entrance 64. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit. On the other hand, during the probability change or during the short time, the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is likely to be in an open state and is easy to enter the second entrance 640. Toward the right side of the variable display device 80, the ball is fired so that the ball passes (right-handed), and the goal is to hit 15R probability variation by hitting the second entrance 640, It is advantageous for the player.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment launches a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed between “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Thus, the player can be changed in the way the ball is hit, so that the game can be enjoyed.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, and flags illustrated in FIGS. 7A and 8, a stack area that stores the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201, the return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as various flags and counters and I / O are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 24), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (see FIG. 23) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is immediately input, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is driven to open / close forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, and the specific winning opening 65a as an axis. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for driving and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle 51 is detected on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball firing is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, Controls the driving of the third actors 87 to 89. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 225 includes a main control device 110, a display control device 114, a sound output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, a first accessory vertical movement solenoid 87a, a first accessory rotation motor 87b, A two-piece article hand-way solenoid 88a, a third-piece rotation motor 89a, and the like are connected to each other.

  The sound lamp control device 113 transmits to the third symbol display device 81 a command related to a variation effect such as a variation pattern command and a stop type command received from the main control device 110. The display control device 114 determines a detailed execution mode (variation pattern) of the variation effect based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command received from the sound lamp control device 113, and uses the determined detailed variation pattern to determine the third variation pattern. A variation effect is executed by the symbol display device 81.

  The audio lamp control device 113 monitors input from the frame button 22 and transmits a frame button operation command to the display control device 114 when the player operates the frame button 22. The display control device 114 selects an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the frame button operation command, and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the selected image.

  In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display type command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Although details will be described later, the display control device 114 notifies the audio lamp control device 113 of the display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by a display type command. The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound corresponding to the display content from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display type command received from the display control device 114, and The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  Further, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the accessory operation start command from the display control device 114, the first accessory 87, the second accessory 88, and the third accessory 89 are responded to the accessory operation start command. Drive one of them. The accessory operation start command is a command transmitted from the display control device 114 to the sound lamp control device 113, and information on the type of the movable accessory that should start the operation (driving) and And information on an operation mode indicating how to operate.

  In the display control device 114, detailed execution modes (variation patterns) of the variation effects including the notice effect are based on the variation pattern commands, stop type commands, and the like received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113. decide. At this time, according to the determined detailed variation pattern, it is determined whether or not to perform the notice effect using the first accessory 87, the second accessory 88, or the third accessory 89, and its operation mode Is determined. Based on the determination, the display control device 114 is the timing of starting the operation of any one of the first accessory 87 to the third accessory 89, and the type of the movable accessory to be operated (the accessory type). A command for starting an accessory operation including information related to the information and its operation mode is generated and transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the sound lamp control device 113, the ROM 222 stores the accessory driving control data for driving the corresponding movable accessory in the corresponding operation mode in association with the movable accessory type and the operation mode. For example, when one operation mode is set for the first accessory 87, the accessory drive control data for driving the first accessory 87 for each operation mode is stored in the ROM 222. When four operation modes are set for the second accessory 88 and three operation modes are set for the third accessory 89, for the second accessory 88, every four operation modes are set. For the third accessory 89, accessory drive control data for driving each movable accessory is stored in the ROM 222 for each of the three operation modes.

  When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the accessory operation start command from the display control device 114, the accessory operation control data corresponding to the operation mode of the movable accessory type indicated by the accessory operation start command is read from the ROM 222, In accordance with the accessory driving control data, the movable accessory indicated by the movable accessory type is operated.

  When operating the first accessory 87, the sound lamp control device 113 drives the first accessory up / down moving solenoid 87a and the first accessory rotating motor 87b in accordance with the accessory drive control data. When operating the second accessory 88, the sound lamp control device 113 drives the second accessory vertical movement solenoid 88a according to the drive pattern. When operating the third accessory 89, the sound lamp controller 113 drives the third accessory rotation motor 89a according to the drive pattern.

  The first accessory vertical movement solenoid 87a is a solenoid for moving the first accessory 87 in the downward direction of the game area. When the first accessory vertical movement solenoid 87a is driven, the first accessory 87 stored in the center frame 86 is lowered and becomes visible to the player. In addition, when the driving of the first action vertical movement solenoid 87a is released (when the first action / action solenoid 87a is released), the first action 87 that has been visually recognized by the player rises and is stored in the center frame 86 again. As a result, the player becomes invisible.

  The first accessory rotation motor 87b is a motor for rotating the first accessory 87. When the first accessory rotation motor 87b is driven, the first accessory 87 rotates in the clockwise direction in the game area (in the direction of arrow A in FIG. 2).

  The second accessory vertical movement solenoid 88a is a solenoid for moving the second accessory 87 in a front view upward direction of the game area. When the second accessory vertical movement solenoid 88a is driven, the second accessory 88 stored in the center frame 86 rises and becomes visible to the player. When the driving of the second accessory vertical movement solenoid 88a is released (when it is in a non-driven state), the second accessory 88 that has been visually recognized by the player is lowered and stored in the center frame 86 again. As a result, the player becomes invisible.

  The third accessory rotating motor 89a is a motor for rotating the third accessory 89. As described above, the third accessory 89 has a center frame with the center axis of the cylindrical shape parallel to the vertical direction of the game area when viewed from the front of the game area so that the side surface of the cylinder is visible in the front view of the game area. 87 is attached. When the third accessory rotation motor 89a is driven, the third accessory 89 rotates clockwise when the rotation axis is viewed from above the gaming machine with the central axis of the cylinder as the rotation axis (arrow B in FIG. 2). Direction).

  The RAM 223 has at least a special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and a special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b.

  The special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is similar to the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 in accordance with the start winning to the first entrance 64, and the first symbol display device 37 (and third The counter is a counter that counts up to four times the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable effects held in the main control device 110, which are the variable effects performed in the symbol display device 81).

  The special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b is similar to the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110, and the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol) in accordance with the start winning to the second entrance 640. The counter is a counter that counts up to four times the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable effects held in the main control device 110, which are the variable effects performed in the symbol display device 81).

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110 and the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. The value cannot be obtained. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls that have won the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 based on the command transmitted from the main controller 110, respectively. The number of held balls is managed by the ball number counter 223a and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b.

  Specifically, the voice lamp control device 113 adds the number of reserved balls of the fluctuating effect by the start winning to the first entrance 64, and adds the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d in the main controller 110. When the special figure 1 reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received, the addition of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 included in the special figure 1 reserved ball number command is received. The later value (that is, the number of balls held for the variation effect accompanying the start winning to the first ball slot 64 held in the main controller 110) is stored in the special figure 1 held ball number counter 223a (S2007 in FIG. 27). reference).

  In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 adds the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e in the main control device 110 by adding the number of reserved balls of the variation effect by the start winning to the second entrance 640. When the special figure 2 reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received, the value after addition of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110 is included in the special figure 2 reserved ball number command. (That is, the number of reserved balls of the fluctuating effect accompanying the start winning to the second entrance 640 reserved in the main controller 110) is stored in the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b (see S2010 of FIG. 27).

  On the other hand, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 when the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted in the main control device 110. When the variation effect mode in the 3rd symbol display device 81 is set along with the reception, the variation effect is associated with the start winning at the first entrance 64 or to the second entrance 640. One value is subtracted from either one of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b depending on whether the start winning prize is involved (see S2108 and S2110 in FIG. 28). Whether or not the variation effect is associated with the start winning at the first entrance 64 or the start winning at the second entrance 640 is indicated in the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110. Is included, and a determination is made based on the information.

  In this way, according to the command transmitted from the main controller 110, the values of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b are updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the counter 203d and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e.

  The values of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b are used to display the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the special figure 1 reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, or receives the variation pattern command. Accordingly, at the timing when the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is updated, the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a after the storage or update is to be notified to the display control device 114. Then, the display special figure 1 reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114 (see S2008 in FIG. 27 and S2109 in FIG. 28).

  In response to the reception of the special figure 2 reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b or receives the variation pattern command. Accordingly, at the timing of updating the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b, the display control device 114 is notified of the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b after the storage or update. Then, the display special figure 2 reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114 (see S2011 in FIG. 27 and S2111 in FIG. 28).

  When the display controller 114 receives the display special figure 1 reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp controller 113 is obtained. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the number of reserved balls is displayed in the reserved display area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. When the display controller 114 receives the display special figure 2 reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball counter 223b of the voice lamp controller 113 is displayed. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the number of reserved balls for the minute is displayed in the reserved display area Ds2 of the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b are synchronized with the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. , Its value is changed. Accordingly, the number of reserved balls displayed in the reserved display areas Ds1 and Ds2 of the third symbol display device 81 is also the same as that of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. It can be changed while synchronizing with the value. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variation display is held.

  The RAM 223 also stores a command received from the main control device 110, a main control command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing commands received until the processing corresponding to the command is performed, and commands received by the display control device 114. A display control command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing until a process corresponding to the command is performed, a change start flag (not shown) indicating that a change effect should be started in the ON state, and the like Have.

  Each of the main control command storage area and the display control command storage area is configured by a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the main command determination process (see FIG. 27) of the sound lamp processing device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the main control command storage area, and the main command is read out. The command is analyzed by the determination process, and a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  When the display command determination process (see FIG. 29) is executed by the sound lamp control device 113, the first stored display command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the display control command storage area. Then, the display command determination process analyzes the command and performs a process according to the command.

  The fluctuation start flag is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when a stop type command output from the main controller 110 is received (see S2004 in FIG. 27). Then, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S2102 in FIG. 28).

  The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 can produce a variation effect of the third symbol. The display is controlled. In addition, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display type command for notifying the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 outputs the sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display type command, thereby performing the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226. Can be combined.

  Further, the display control device 114 determines whether to perform a notice effect using the first accessory 87, the second accessory 88, or the third accessory 89 according to the variation pattern displayed on the third symbol display device 81. To do. Then, in the display control device 114, when it is determined to perform a notice effect using the first accessory 87, the second accessory 88, or the third accessory 89, it is determined to be used in the notice effect. The display control device 114 notifies the sound lamp control device 113 of this as an accessory operation start command, including the operation mode of the first accessory 87, the second accessory 88, or the third accessory 89. The The voice lamp control device 113 uses a solenoid or a motor provided in each movable accessory so that the movable accessory indicated by the accessory action start command is operated in the operation mode indicated by the accessory action start command. To drive. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure and the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 4). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid 209, a first action vertical movement solenoid 87a, and a second action vertical movement. Solenoid 88a and other solenoids, motor 1b rotating motor 87b, motor 3a rotating third motor 89a, etc., 12 volt voltage, logic 5 volt voltage, RAM backup backup A voltage or the like is generated, and a necessary voltage is supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like using the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage and the backup voltage.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 4) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a program ROM 232, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input / output port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. ing.

  The voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input / output port 238, and the display control device 114 sends a command for instructing the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 determined by the voice lamp control device 113 to the voice lamp control device. 113, and the display type command for notifying the display content to be actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 under the control of the display control device 114 and the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. An accessory operation start command for instructing operation start of the first accessory 87, the second accessory 88, and the third accessory 89 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  An MPU 231, a program ROM 232, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, and an image controller 237 are also connected to the input / output port 238 via the bus line 240. A video RAM 236 is connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with different winning probability for winning the jackpot and the number of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot, there is a model having the same specifications as the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the display control device 114 is made into a common part to reduce the cost.

  The MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the command input from the sound lamp control device 113. The program ROM 232 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data. The ROM 232 includes at least a display data table storage area 232a, a reach combination table storage area 232b, and an additional data table storage area 232c.

  The display data table storage area 232a is an area in which a display data table prepared for each effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110 is stored. The display data table is an area in which a display data table describing the display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time in an effect corresponding to the display data table is stored. The MPU 231 determines an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, reads out the display data table corresponding to the effect from the display data table storage area 232a, and reads the read-out data table. The display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled according to the display data table.

  Here, details of the display data table will be described. The display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the sound lamp control device 113. A display data table corresponding to the restart effect is prepared.

  For variable effects, the variable effects are subdivided into periods such as a high-speed variable period, a normal variable period, a super reach period, and a special reach period, and a display data table is prepared for each pattern prepared for each period. ing. Here, the configuration of the variation effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration of a fluctuating effect in special reach.

  In the variation effect, when the variation effect is started, a high-speed variation period in which the symbol variation is performed at high speed in all three symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is started. One or more display data tables are prepared for this high-speed fluctuation period.

  In the case of complete disconnection, after the high-speed fluctuation period, a complete disconnection stop display period (not shown) in which the out symbol is stopped and displayed on the active line L1 in the order of the left symbol column Z1, the right symbol column Z3 and the middle symbol column Z2. One or a plurality of display data tables are prepared for the complete outage stop display period.

  Further, when the reach is generated after the high speed fluctuation period, the same symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3, and then the middle symbol row Z2 is set to the medium speed or low speed. It becomes a normal reach period to display variably. For this normal reach period, one or more display data tables that finally display all symbols in a normal reach and one or more display data tables that are developed into a special reach after normal reach are prepared.

  After the normal reach period, the super reach period is used when developing to super reach. For the super reach period, a display data table is prepared for each of the prepared super reach production contents (super reach patterns). In addition, for super reach patterns that may develop into special reach after super reach, there is one display data table that finally stops all symbols in super reach with this super reach pattern, and this super reach pattern And a display data table that develops into a special reach after super-reach.

  After the special reach period, if you want to develop into a special reach, it will be a special reach period. For the special reach period, a display data table is prepared for each special reach production content (special reach pattern).

  When the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 displays the variation pattern corresponding to the variation time indicated by the display variation pattern command on the third symbol display device 81. Determine the variation pattern to be performed. And the combination of the display data table for displaying the determined fluctuation pattern on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is determined. For example, when one special reach is determined as the variation pattern to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, each of the high-speed variation period, normal reach period, super reach period, and special reach period constituting the determined special reach A combination of display data tables used in the period is determined.

  In a high-speed fluctuation period, a normal reach period, and the like, display common to each fluctuation pattern is often performed. As in this embodiment, by preparing a display data table corresponding to each period, the display data table for the period displayed in common is duplicated as compared with the case where a display data table is prepared for each variation pattern. Therefore, the program ROM 232 does not need to have the storage capacity of the program ROM 232 necessary for storing the display data table.

  In addition, a display data table is prepared for each of the super reach period and the special reach period, so that the combination of the super reach pattern before the special reach and the special reach pattern after the special reach is developed. Even if the number is increased, there is no need to prepare a display data table for each combination, and the storage capacity required for the program ROM 232 can be kept small. Therefore, since many combinations of the super reach pattern before developing to the special reach and the special reach pattern after developing to the special reach can be prepared, it is possible to prepare a wide variety of variation effects. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest in the player's variation effect.

  The demonstration effect is an effect that is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect associated with the start prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. The third symbol composed of the main symbols without the numerals “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the back image is changed. If a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a hall-related person can recognize that no game is being played in the pachinko machine 10.

  The confirmed display effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the stop symbol is confirmed and received by receiving a confirmed command (display confirmation command) from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 after the variation effect. It is an effect that is displayed. For example, when the stop symbol is an outlier symbol, an effect of emphasizing the loss is performed, and when the stop symbol is either 15R probability big jackpot, 15R normal jackpot or 4R probability big jackpot, each jackpot is emphasized. Production is performed. The player can easily determine the game value given by the content of the stop symbol by visually recognizing the final display effect.

  The restart effect is when the fixed command transmitted from the main controller 110 is not received even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the third symbol is stopped and displayed with the end of the variation effect indicated by the variation pattern command. This is an effect of causing the third symbol display device 81 to display an image obtained by vibrating (swinging) the third symbol around a predetermined position. When the player visually recognizes that the third symbol vibrates and is displayed after the change of the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the stop symbol is not fixed at that time. Can be recognized.

  Returning to FIG. 10, the description of the display data table storage area 232a will be continued. In the display data table storage area 232a, one display data table corresponding to each of the demonstration effect and the restart effect is stored. In addition, the display data table storage area 232a is an area for storing a display data table for fluctuating effects, a high-speed fluctuation storage area 232a1, a normal reach storage area 232a2, a super reach storage area 232a3, and a special reach storage area 232a4. Is provided. The display data table corresponding to the high-speed fluctuation period is stored in the high-speed fluctuation storage area 232a1, the display data table corresponding to the normal reach period is stored in the normal reach storage area 232a2, and the display data table corresponding to the super-reach period is super-reach. The display data table stored in the storage area 232a3 and corresponding to the special reach period is stored in the special reach storage area 232a4.

  Furthermore, the display data table storage area 232a is provided with an effect selection storage area 232a5. This effect selection storage area 232a5 is an area in which a display data table for displaying the effect selection image on the third symbol display device 81 is stored.

  Here, the effect selection image will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an effect selection image. The effect selection image refers to an effect pattern (reach type) to be displayed in advance in the change effect when one notification (an announcement that is a big hit with a probability of 100%) is made by operating the first actor 87. ) Is an image for the player to select.

  Specifically, the single announcement is made at an arbitrary timing when the variable effect is in the reach state when the variable effect that is a big hit is performed on the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 12A). Then, the first player 87 is lowered from the center frame 86 and rotated in the clockwise direction (arrow A direction) in the game area (FIG. 12 (b)). It is predicted that it will be a big hit with a probability of 100%. When the first character 87 rises and is stored again in the center frame 86 and becomes invisible to the player, that is, when one notification by the first character 87 is completed, this is displayed in advance in the variation effect. In order to allow the player to select an effect pattern (reach pattern), an effect selection image 81a shown in FIG. 12C is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In this effect selection image 81a, thumbnail images corresponding to the three reach types are displayed, and “Please select a reach!” Is displayed in the center of the screen, so that the three reach types displayed can be selected. The reach type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the player. In the center of the right side of the screen, “Remaining ○ seconds” (remaining seconds are entered in ○) is displayed to indicate the remaining time for which the reach type can be selected, and the reach type is selected within the remaining time. The player is encouraged to do so.

  The player selects the reach type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from the three reach types displayed on the effect selection image 81a within the time displayed on the effect selection image. An image corresponding to the selected reach type can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, as described above, one notification by the first accessory 87 is performed at an arbitrary timing when the variation effect is in the reach state. That is, as shown in FIG. 11, one notification is made at an arbitrary timing in the normal reach period, the super reach period, and the special reach period. That is, the normal reach period to the special reach period can all be referred to as a single notification occurrence period. The timing at which one notification is made is determined by the display control device 114 by the one notification lottery counter 233f described later.

  On the other hand, as described above, the one-shot notification is a notice effect indicating that the fluctuating effect in which the one-shot notification is performed is a big hit with a probability of 100%. If the change pattern of the change effect has a long change time such as super reach or special reach, the following problem may occur if one notification is made at an early stage such as a normal reach period.

  In other words, if a single announcement is made, the player can recognize that it is a big hit with a probability of 100% in the variation production, but even if one announcement is made, the variation time of the variation production is not shortened. As such, the player must wait for the jackpot until the variable time indicated by the main controller 110 has elapsed. In addition, a super-reach pattern or a special reach pattern that is expected to generate a jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even though the jackpot is fixed until the jackpot is generated. There is a risk of arousal. In addition, since the super reach period and the special reach period generally require a long time to enhance the interest of the player, the player may be bored.

  On the other hand, in the present pachinko machine 10, when one notification is made during one variation effect, the effect selection image 81a is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the variation effect after the one notification, and the effect is displayed. The player can select the reach type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from the three reach types whose thumbnail images are displayed in the selected image 81a. As a result, when one announcement is made in one variation effect, the variation effect can be performed with the reach pattern corresponding to the reach type that the player wants to watch until the player wins the variation effect. Therefore, it is possible to show the reach pattern image corresponding to the reach type that the player wants to watch to the player who has been found to be a big hit in the variation production by one notification, so the player's interest is maintained. However, the game can be continued by the player.

  In general, various reach types are prepared for the pachinko machine 10, but there are not a few reach patterns with a very low probability of appearance in order for the player to feel a special feeling. By making it possible to select a reach pattern with a very low appearance probability in the effect selection image 81a displayed after one announcement is made, the player can be shown a reach pattern with a very low appearance probability. Can do. Therefore, a player who has been found to be a big hit in the fluctuating performance with a single announcement can experience a special feeling by seeing a reach pattern with a very low appearance probability, and can enhance the interest in the game .

  The display data table stored in the effect selection storage table 232a5 is data for displaying a portion of the effect selection image 81a excluding the selected three reach type thumbnail images. Data for displaying thumbnail images is defined by an additional data table stored in an effect thumbnail storage area 232c1 described later.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display data table for change in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time for displaying an image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) is represented as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and according to the type of the sprite, the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, and the translucency Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81, such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in an enlarged size than the standard size. If the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced in size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite. The higher the translucency value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variable display data table, as a drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Light in the image. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters and characters used for various effects such as people and characters, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information Since it is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type, is defined in the display data table for change. This back surface type is any of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage (any one of “town stage”, “sea stage”, “mountain stage”) selected by the player operating the frame button 22. Or the information specifying whether to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C. The back surface type also includes information specifying which back image to display when specifying that a back image different from the back surfaces A to C is displayed.

  When the MPU 231 specifies that any one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage specified by the player among the back surfaces A to C as the drawing target. . On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back surface type.

  In the present embodiment, the case where only the back surface type is specified as the back image rendering content in the display data table will be described, but instead of this, the back surface type and the back surface type corresponding to which state You may make it prescribe | regulate the display status information which shows whether a back image should be displayed. The rear image is displayed with the display range, brightness, color, etc. changed with the passage of time. This display state information may be information indicating an elapsed time after the rear image in the initial state is displayed, for example. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the back image in the initial state indicated by the display state information is displayed.

  The display state information is information indicating an elapsed time from the start of drawing an image based on the display data table (or displaying the image based on the display data table on the third symbol display device 81). May be. In this case, the MPU 231 starts drawing the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the display data table (or displaying the image based on the display data table on the third symbol display device 81). Based on the state of the back image displayed in the stage and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the display state information (or display of the image on the third symbol display device 81) is started. Identify.

  Further, the display state information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image corresponding to the initial state is displayed and drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the image based on the display data table depending on the rear surface type). It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the display on the 3rd symbol display device 81 is started, and the type information ( For example, it is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed, or the image drawing based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 for the image based on the display data table). Information indicating whether it is information indicating the elapsed time since the start of display) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the display state information may be information indicating an address at which a back image to be displayed is stored instead of information indicating elapsed time.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), A unique identification number assigned to the third symbol is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. In the present embodiment, a unique identification number for identifying each of the third symbols is attached to each of the third symbols. For example, “0” is assigned to the main symbol “0”, “1” is assigned to the main symbol “1”, and “1” is assigned to the main symbol “2”. 2 "is attached.

  In addition, as the symbol type information of the third symbol from when the variation starts until the predetermined time elapses, the identification information of the third symbol is not directly defined, but the variation effect performed immediately before is stopped. Offset information with the symbol identification number is described. This offset information is information representing the difference between the identification numbers assigned to the third symbols.

  The offset information is specified as the symbol type information of the third symbol until the predetermined time elapses after the change is started. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the display of the variation effect performed immediately before. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol. Until the elapse of a predetermined time from the start of the change, as the symbol type information at each address, the identification information of the third symbol to be displayed at the time corresponding to that address and the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before The difference (offset information) from the identification information is described. Thereby, the variation effect can be started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  In addition, as the symbol type information, the third symbol is displayed at a high speed during the predetermined time when the offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is switched to the identification number itself of the third symbol to be actually displayed. It is set so that the time is displayed in a variable manner. While the third symbol is variably displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the symbol of the change effect that was performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently being performed, even if the continuity of the number 3 symbol is interrupted, the player will not recognize the discontinuity of the number continuity be able to.

  In the display data table, in addition to the drawing content, the display content of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is defined at some addresses. For example, when displaying high-speed fluctuation, the display content is defined as “high-speed fluctuation display”, and when displaying a girl character image, the display content is defined as “girl character display”, and a light-emitting effect image is displayed. When it is to be displayed, the display content is defined as “light emission effect display”.

  When the establishment of the probability variation reach is displayed, the display content defines “establishment of the probability variation reach” together with the type of the main symbol for which the probability variation reach is established. When displaying the establishment of the normal reach, “normal reach establishment” is defined as the display content together with the type of the main symbol that established the normal reach.

  The display content defined in the display data table is used to notify the sound lamp control device 113 of the display content displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, in the display data table, in addition to the drawing contents, “actual object driving” information indicating the start of operation of the second and third objects 88 and 89 is defined at some addresses. The second accessory 88 and the third accessory 89 are driven in accordance with the effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the display data table is displayed in the third symbol display by the display data table. In accordance with the image displayed on the device 81, the “actual object driving” information is defined so that either the second accessory 88 or the third accessory 89 is driven.

  The “actual accessory driving” information is configured by the type of movable accessory (movable accessory type) for starting the operation and the operation mode indicating the operation content of the movable accessory. As the movable combination type, either the second combination 88 or the third combination 89 is defined. In addition, the operation mode is defined as one operation mode among a plurality of operation modes set in advance for each movable accessory 88 and 89.

  The display control device 114 generates an accessory action start command including information related to the movable accessory type to be started from the operation and information related to the operation mode based on the “actual accessory driving” information, and the sound lamp control device It transmits to 113.

  “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the top address of the display data table, and the data table is stored in the last address of the display data table (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 13). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, the rendering contents corresponding to the rendering mode to be specified in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the display data table storage area 232a, stored in a display data table buffer 233a (to be described later) provided in the work RAM 233, and the pointer 233c is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233c is incremented by one. In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a, based on the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233c, The content of the image to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 16) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller is instructed to draw the image. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined in the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233c, so that the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  When the display content is defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233c, a display type command representing the display content is generated according to the display content, and the display type command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Thereby, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is notified with respect to the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 113. FIG. In the audio lamp control device 113, control is performed so that the audio output device 226 outputs audio corresponding to the display content notified by the display type command.

  Further, in the case where the accessory driving information is defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233c, the accessory operation including information related to the movable accessory type to start operation from now on and information related to the operation mode according to the accessory driving information. A start command is generated and transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives this accessory action start command, each of the movable action objects indicated by the accessory action start command operates so as to operate in the operation mode indicated by the accessory action start command. Drives the solenoid and motor provided in the accessory.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like, The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233a as appropriate, instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is required for starting up and executing a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233a. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason that the pachinko machine 10 can create is that an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance is determined based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the presentation mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Returning to FIG. 10, the description will be continued. The reach combination table storage area 232b is an area for storing a reach combination table. Here, the details of the reach combination table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the reach combination table stored in the reach combination table storage area 232b.

  In the reach combination table, as shown in FIG. 14, the super reach pattern and the special reach pattern to be used are defined for each reach type prepared for the super reach and the special reach. For example, the super reach pattern “examination reach pattern” is associated with the reach type “examination reach”. The reach type “treasure reach” is associated with the super reach pattern “lottery reach pattern” and the special reach pattern “treasure reach pattern”.

  The reach type “examination reach” is one type of super reach, and no special reach pattern is associated. Also, in the reach type of other super reach, the reach combination table only associates with the super reach pattern and does not associate the special reach pattern.

  Based on the variation time indicated by the variation pattern command for display received from the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 determines detailed variation that can produce a variation effect in the variation time. When the determined detailed variation pattern is the reach type “examination reach” which is one of the super reach, the “examination reach pattern” is determined as the super reach pattern of the super reach period based on the reach combination table. Then, a display data table corresponding to “examination reach pattern” is set as the display data table for the super reach period, and the examination reach is executed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the display data table.

  In addition, when the determined detailed variation pattern is the reach type “Treasure Reach” which is one of the special reach, the “Lottery Reach Pattern” is selected as the super reach pattern for the super reach period based on the reach combination table. The “treasure reach pattern” is determined as the special reach pattern during the special reach period. Then, a display data table corresponding to the “lottery reach pattern” is set as the display data table for the super reach period, and a display data table corresponding to the “treasure reach pattern” is set as the display data table for the special reach period. The treasure reach is executed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the display data table.

  The reach combination table also defines the time required to display both the super reach pattern and the special reach pattern and the time required to display the special reach pattern for each reach type. Yes. Since the reach type of super reach does not develop into special reach, the time required to display both the super reach pattern and the special reach pattern is defined as the time required to display only the super reach as a result. In addition, the time required for displaying the special reach pattern is defined as “0”.

  These required times are referred to when a reach type to be displayed as a selection candidate is extracted from the effect selection image. Details thereof will be described later.

  Returning to FIG. In the additional data table storage area 232c, the display contents of the effect to be added and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for one effect based on the command from the main control device 110 are added data prepared for each effect. This is the area where the table is stored. Here, “adding to one effect” means changing the display content of one effect based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, an image that is not normally displayed in one effect is displayed. The concept of displaying and changing another effect on the one effect, changing part or all of the color tone of the one effect, and changing the image displayed in the one effect. Is included.

  That is, the additional data table is a drawing content necessary for adding and displaying an image that is not normally displayed for one effect displayed by the display data table selected based on the command from the main controller 110. Also, the drawing content required to change part or all of the color tone in the one production, and the drawing content necessary to change and display the image displayed in the one production are predetermined. It is.

  Here, the details of the additional data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the additional data table.

  In the present embodiment, for example, the first actor 87 is operated with respect to the variation effect displayed by the variation display data table selected based on the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) from the main controller 110. If it is decided to make a single announcement, an operation mode of the first accessory 87 and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 together with the operation of the first accessory are added. The display contents to be displayed are defined by the additional data table.

  In the additional data table, corresponding to the address specified in the display data table, the image content (drawing content) for one frame to be additionally displayed at the time indicated by the address, and the first action 87 at that time. In the case of starting the operation, the “actuary drive” information indicating the start of the operation of the first accessory 87 is defined in detail.

  The drawing content defines the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object to be additionally displayed on the image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81 such as translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information is defined. In addition, as the accessory driving information, the type of the movable accessory that starts the operation (here, the first accessory) and the operation mode indicating the operation content of the first accessory 87 are defined.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 15, the sprite type (effect type), the display position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle are associated with one effect (effect 1) in association with the address “0097H” defined in the display data table. , Semi-transparency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information are defined. Further, as the accessory driving information for starting the operation of the first accessory, the type of the movable accessory that starts the operation (here, the first accessory) and the operation indicating the operation content of the first accessory 87 A mode is defined. As a result, when the time indicated by the address “0097H” defined in the display data table is reached, the operation of the first accessory 87 is started in accordance with the additional data table. An image corresponding to effect 1 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if there is no display object to be additionally displayed at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, this means that there is no display object to be added corresponding to that address in the additional data table. Null data is defined (corresponding to the address “0001H” in FIG. 15).

  In the present embodiment, the first actor 87 is operated with respect to the variation effect displayed by the variation display data table selected based on the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) from the main controller 110. If it is decided to make a single announcement, an operation mode of the first accessory 87 and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 together with the operation of the first accessory are added. Although the case where the display contents to be displayed is defined by the additional data table has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the change content selected based on the change pattern command (display change pattern command) from the main control device 110 The display contents for displaying the notice effect image displayed in addition to the variable effect displayed by the display data table are displayed in the additional data table. It may be defined me.

  Further, in the additional data table, as in the display data table, in addition to the above-described drawing content, the display content of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from now on may be defined at some addresses. For example, when a notice effect using “fish school” is additionally displayed, “fish school” may be defined as the display content.

  Further, in the additional data table, not only the first accessory 87 but also “drawing contents”, “actual agent driving” information indicating the start of operation of the second accessory 88 and the third accessory 89 at some addresses. May be defined. The second accessory 88 and the third accessory 89 are driven in accordance with the effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the additional data table is displayed in the third symbol display by the additional data table. In accordance with the image displayed on the device 81, the “actual object driving” information may be defined so that either the second accessory 88 or the third accessory 89 is driven.

  As with the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” that is the start address of the additional data table, and the final address of the additional data table (“00FDH in the example of FIG. 15). “)” Describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the rendering contents corresponding to the rendering mode to be specified in the additional data table Is described.

  When the MPU 231 determines the operation of the first accessory 87 (execution of the one-shot notice), the MPU 231 reads an additional data table for operating the first accessory 87 from the additional data table storage area 232c, and stores the work RAM 233 described later. Store in the additional data table buffer 233b. At this time, in the additional data table buffer 233b, the “actual object driving” information for defining the start of the operation of the first accessory is defined at the address corresponding to the time for starting the operation of the first accessory 87. Stores additional data tables.

  Then, every time the pointer 233c is updated, the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233c is displayed from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233b. The image contents to be drawn next are specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 17) described later is created.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 15, when the pointer 233c becomes “0097H”, the MPU 231 is specified by the address “0097H” of the additional data table to the various sprites specified by the address “0097H” of the display data table. The drawing list is created by adding the sprite of effect 1 and the image controller 237 is instructed to draw the image. Further, the MPU 231 determines the information on the movable accessory type (here, the first accessory) to be started based on the “actual accessory drive” information defined in the address “0097H” of the additional data table, and the operation thereof. An accessory operation start command including information related to the aspect is generated and transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives this accessory action start command, the first accessory up / down solenoid 87a and the second action solenoid are operated to operate the first accessory 87 in accordance with the action mode included in the accessory action start command. The single-function rotating motor 87b is driven.

  On the other hand, when the pointer 233c is “0001H”, Null data is defined at the address “0001H” of the additional data table, so it is determined that there is no display object to be added, and the address “ A drawing list is generated based on various sprites defined in “0001H”.

  When the information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233c in the additional data table is “End” information, or when the pointer 233c indicates an address not specified in the additional data table (for example, In the example of FIG. 15, it is determined that there is no display object to be added even when the pointer 233c indicates an address after “00FEH”, and drawing is performed based on various sprites defined in the display data table. Generate a list.

  Then, by transmitting the generated drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. Thereby, according to the update of the pointer 233c, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table and the drawing contents specified in the additional data table are added. Therefore, the display data table and the additional data table An image as defined is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 should display the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110. In addition to an effect image (for example, a variable effect image), when displaying another effect image (for example, an image to be displayed together with the action of the first accessory), the other effect image to be additionally displayed By setting the additional data table corresponding to に in the additional data table buffer 233b, the effect image can be easily added to the base effect image and displayed. Thereby, for example, in the case where there are 32 types of original effect images and there are two types of other effect images to be displayed additionally, a display that prescribes an image in which other effect images are superimposed for each original effect image If a data table is prepared separately, 32 × (1 + 2) = 96 types of display data tables must be prepared. As in this pachinko machine 10, a data table corresponding to another effect image is used as an additional data table. By defining separately, 32 + 2 = 34 types of displays and additional data tables may be prepared, and an increase in the capacity of the ROM 232 can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to store data tables corresponding to various types of effects in the capacity prepared in the ROM 232, and it is possible to easily further diversify the effects images.

  Moreover, after setting the display data table corresponding to the original effect image in the display data table buffer 233a by prescribing other effect images to be additionally displayed as the additional data table as in the pachinko machine 10, Even when display of other effect images to be additionally displayed is determined, an additional data table corresponding to another effect image is added without changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a. By simply setting in the data table buffer 233b, other effect images to be added and displayed can be easily added to the original effect image and displayed.

  In addition, since the additional data table has the same data structure as the display data table, the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data set in the additional data table buffer 233b. While updating the pointer 233c for each time from the table, it is possible to easily specify the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer, and easily draw one drawing list corresponding to one frame from these. Can be generated. Therefore, in addition to the effect performed based on the command from the main control device 110, even if the display of other effects is determined by the audio lamp control device 113 or the like, the effect to be displayed additionally is displayed. By defining the display contents in the additional data table, it is possible to easily perform a wide variety of presentations from a small number of data tables.

  Returning to FIG. 10, the description will be continued. In the additional data table storage area 232c, an effect thumbnail storage area 232c1 is also provided. The effect thumbnail storage area 232c1 is a thumbnail corresponding to the reach type that the player selects for the effect selection image 81a displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the effect selection storage area 232a5. This is an area in which an additional data table for adding and displaying an image is stored for each reach type.

  When displaying the effect selection image 81a, the MPU 231 determines three reach types to be selected by the player from the effect selection image 81a. A display data table for displaying the effect selection image 81a excluding thumbnail images corresponding to the reach type is set in the display data table buffer 233a, while thumbnail images corresponding to the determined three reach types are displayed. The additional data table is set in the additional data table buffer 233b. As a result, the effect selection image 81a on which thumbnail images corresponding to the selected three reach types are displayed can be easily combined with the third symbol display device 81 while allowing a combination of reach types to be displayed as thumbnail images. Can be displayed. When the effect selection image 81a including the thumbnail image is defined as a display data table, a display data table for the effect selection image 81a must be prepared for all combinations of reach types, and stored in the program ROM 232. There is a risk of increasing the capacity. On the other hand, if a thumbnail image is defined as an additional data table for each reach type, it is sufficient to prepare at least one display data table corresponding to the effect selection image 81a, so that an increase in the storage capacity of the program ROM 232 can be suppressed. .

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. The work RAM 233 has at least a display data table buffer 233a, an additional data table buffer 223b, a pointer 233c, a drawing list area 233d, a time counter 233e, a single notification lottery counter 233f, a single notification flag 233g, and a remaining variation time memory 233h. doing.

  The display data table buffer 233a stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 113 or the like. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode in the display data table storage area 223a. The selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233a. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233c one by one, and the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233c in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a. A drawing list (see FIG. 16), which will be described later, describing the contents of the image drawing instruction is generated. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays effects corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a.

  When the display content is defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233c, a display type command representing the display content is generated according to the display content, and the display type command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Thereby, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is notified with respect to the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 113. FIG. In the audio lamp control device 113, control is performed so that the audio output device 226 outputs audio corresponding to the display content notified by the display type command.

  Further, when the accessory driving information is defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233c, the accessory operation includes information relating to the movable accessory type to be started to operate and information relating to the operation mode according to the accessory driving information. A start command is generated and transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives this accessory action start command, each of the movable action objects indicated by the accessory action start command operates so as to operate in the operation mode indicated by the accessory action start command. Drives the solenoid and motor provided in the accessory.

  The additional data table buffer 233b produces an effect that is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a in response to a command / execution command from the sound lamp control device 113. This is a buffer for storing an additional data table corresponding to an effect (an image imitating the first accessory, the second accessory, etc.) to be additionally displayed. As the MPU 231 stores the display data table in the display data table buffer 233a, the MPU 231 once writes Null data indicating that there is no display object to be added and displayed in the additional data table buffer 233b. Clear the contents.

  Thereafter, the MPU 231 uses the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a based on the command from the sound lamp control device 113, the operation start of the first accessory 87 (ie, execution of one notification), and the like. If there is an effect to be displayed in addition to the effect to be displayed in addition to the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, an additional data table corresponding to that effect is displayed in the data table storage area 233b. The selected additional data table is stored in the additional data table buffer 233b.

  Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233c one by one, and stores the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233c in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table buffer 233b. In the additional data table, a drawing list (see FIG. 16) to be described later describing the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 237 is generated for each frame based on the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233c. . As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the additional data table in addition to the effect corresponding to the display data table.

  Further, when the accessory driving information is defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233c in the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233b, the movable combination to be started to operate according to the accessory driving information. An accessory operation start command including information related to the object type and information related to the operation mode is generated and transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives this accessory action start command, each of the movable action objects indicated by the accessory action start command operates so as to operate in the operation mode indicated by the accessory action start command. Drives the solenoid and motor provided in the accessory.

  When the additional data table is not stored in the additional data table buffer 233b, null data is stored in the additional data table buffer 233b. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 has an effect corresponding to the display data table as it is. Is displayed.

  The pointer 233c is for designating an address from which the corresponding drawing contents are to be acquired from the display data table and the additional data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table buffer 233b. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233c to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233a. In the display setting process of the V-interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds from the image controller 237 completing the drawing process of one frame of image, the pointer Update processing is executed (see S2909 in FIG. 37, FIG. 41), and the value of the pointer 233c is incremented by 1 (see S2981 in FIG. 41).

  The MPU 231 updates the address indicated by the pointer 233c each time the pointer 233c is updated, from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233b. A drawing list (see FIG. 16), which will be described later, is created by specifying the drawing contents defined in (1).

  Thereby, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and when the additional data table is stored in the additional data table buffer 233b, The effect corresponding to the additional data table can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in addition to the effect corresponding to the display data table. Therefore, it is possible to easily change the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 simply by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a or the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233b. . Therefore, a variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341.

  The drawing list area 233d is an image controller for drawing an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233b. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image of one frame. As shown in FIG. Symbol (Effect 1, Effect 2,...), Character (Character 1, Character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, Reserved ball number symbol 2,... For each sprite (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite describes the address where the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored. The image controller 237 is a character described later provided in the character ROM 234. The image data of the sprite is acquired from the memory area designated by the address of the storage area 234a. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. The standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the ROM 234 is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucency according to the translucency value Processed, combined with other sprites according to the α blending information, color tone corrected according to the color information, and filtered according to the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information Above, the image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. The drawn image is developed in the video RAM 236 by the image controller 237.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233b, the MPU 231 draws the contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233c and other images to be drawn. Detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame based on the contents of the image (for example, a reserved image that displays the number of reserved balls, a warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.) ) And rearrange the detailed information for each sprite to create a drawing list.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage address of the data of the sprite (display object) is the sprite type specified in the display data table and the additional data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the character storage area 234a where the image data of the sprite is stored is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 immediately sets the address where the image data of the sprite is stored according to the sprite type. And the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  The MPU 231 also displays a display data table and additional data for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. The information specified in the table is copied as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the order of the sprites to be arranged on the back side from the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and displays detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...) Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of characters (character 1, character 2,..., Retained ball number design 1, retained ball number design 2,..., Error design).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  Returning to FIG. 10, the description will be continued. The time counter 233e is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the production effect time displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233a. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (FIG. 31B). ))), The time counter 233e is decremented by one each time the display setting process (S2603, see FIG. 37) is executed. As a result, when the value of the time counter 233e becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a has ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Various processes to be performed are executed.

  The one-notification notification lottery counter 233f is a counter for lottery by operating the first accessory 87 to determine whether or not to perform one-notification and at what timing to perform one-notification. The one notification counter 233f is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 255. The one notification counter 233f is updated in the V interrupt process (FIG. 31 (b)) executed by the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds (see S2606), and one notification counter 233f is set for each update. The value of increases. If the update is performed when the value of the one notification counter 233f is 255, the value is returned to 0.

  The lottery for one notification is performed when a display stop type command is received from the audio lamp control device 113. Specifically, based on the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command, if the stop symbol becomes a jackpot symbol, whether or not to make a single announcement in the variable effect corresponding to the stop symbol, When notification is made, the timing at which one notification is made is determined based on the value of the one notification lottery counter 233f.

  The one notification flag 233g is a flag indicating that one notification is performed. When the flag is on, one notification is performed. When the flag is off, one notification is not performed. The one notification flag 233g is initialized to OFF in the initial setting process (S2401 in FIG. 30) executed after the power is turned on. Then, when it is decided to perform one notification as a result of the one notification notification lottery, the one notification flag 233g is set to ON. Then, after one notification is made and an effect selection image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the frame button 22 is operated by the sound lamp control device 113 while the one notification flag 233g is on. When the display control device 114 receives the frame button operation command shown, the display control device 114 changes the reach type selected by the player from the three reach types displayed in the effect selection image 81a (FIG. 40). S2964). That is, during this time, each time the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the reach type selected by the player among the three reach types is changed. Accordingly, the player can select one of the three reach types displayed in the effect selection image 81a and the reach type to be displayed in the subsequent variable effect by operating the frame button 22. .

  Then, after one announcement is made and the effect selection image is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, after a predetermined period has elapsed (in this embodiment, 7 seconds after the effect selection image is displayed), The one notification flag 233g is set off. As a result, the player can no longer select the reach type in the effect selection image 81a. Then, the display data of the super reach pattern and the special reach pattern corresponding to the reach type selected at this time is set in the display data table buffer 233a. Thereby, the reach image of the reach type selected by the player is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The remaining variation time memory 233h is a memory that stores a variation time (remaining variation time after displaying the effect selection image) remaining after the announcement selection and the effect selection image 81a are displayed. The remaining variation time memory 233h stores the remaining variation time with 20 milliseconds as one unit.

Referring now to FIG. 17, a description will be given of a method of calculating the effect selected image display after the remaining variation time T _5. FIG. 17 shows the variation time T ₀ of the variation effect in which one notification is made, the time T ₁ from the start of the variation effect until the execution of the one notification is started, and the remaining variation after the effect selection image is displayed. is a diagram showing the relationship between time T _5.

In the present embodiment, by setting the execution time T ₂ of the one shot notified to 3 seconds, change the time T3 that remains after execution of one shot announcement is completed is calculated by the following equation (1).

_{T 3 = T 0 -T 1 -T} 2 = T 0 -T 1 -3 ··· (1)
After completion of one shot announcement, in the present embodiment, the display time T ₄ the effect selected image is set to 8 seconds. Therefore, the residual variation time T ₅ after the display effect selected image can be calculated by the following equation (2).

_{T 5 = T 3 -T 4 =} T 0 -T 1 -3-8 = T 0 -T 1 -11 ··· (2)
In other words, by directing the residual variation time T ₅ after the selected image display, the variation time T ₀ as indicated by the display change pattern command, a start time T ₁ of the one-shot announcements determined by one shot announcement lottery counter 233 f, It is calculated by the above equation (2). Here, the calculated effect selected image display after the value of the remaining variation time T ₅ (to be precise, a value obtained by the 20 msec as a unit) is stored in the remaining time varying memory 233 h.

Further, the three reach types displayed in the effect selection image 81a are the time required to display both the super reach pattern and the special reach pattern defined in the reach combination table shown in FIG. 14, or the special reach pattern. time required for displaying is selected from among the following values for the remaining variation time T ₅ after displaying the effect selected image. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 14, if the effect selected value of the remaining variation time T ₅ after the image display 82 seconds, a time required 80 seconds to view the millionaire Reach Special Reach pattern, In addition, since the time required for displaying the treasure reach special reach pattern is 79 seconds, only the special reach of this billionaire reach or only the special reach of the treasure reach is displayed on the effect selection image 81a. It can be selected as one of the reach types.

Further, when the value is 33 the remaining variation time after the display effect selected image T ₅ seconds, lottery reach, matchmaking reach, such as in confession reach, the time required to display both super reach pattern and Special Reach pattern since the following 33 seconds of the effect selected image displaying remaining variation time after T _5, these reach type can be selected as one of the three reach type to be displayed in the effect selected image 81a.

Here, in the three reach types displayed in the effect selection image 81a, the required time for displaying both the super reach pattern and the special reach pattern, or the required time for displaying the special reach pattern is not necessarily effect selected image displaying remaining variation time after T ₅ does not coincide completely. Therefore, when the variable effect is continued according to the reach type selected by the player from the three reach types, the remaining time may occur. On the other hand, the symbol stop when the variation effect is performed according to the selected reach type always matches the end of the variation effect, that is, the elapsed time from the start of the variation is the variation time T of the variation effect. It must be done when it reaches _zero .

  In the present embodiment, the reach type selected from the effect selection image 81a during the remaining time using the remaining time generated when the variable effect is continued according to the reach type selected by the player from the three reach types. A transition effect image for switching to the fluctuating effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. With this transition effect image, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling the remaining time that occurs when the variation effect is continued according to the reach type selected by the player from the three reach types. Further, it is possible to smoothly switch from the effect selection image 81a to the change effect depending on the selected reach type.

  In addition, instead of displaying the transition effect image in this remaining time, the remaining time generated by executing the variable effect depending on the reach type selected at that time is 0 or a predetermined time (for example, 1 (Second) until it is equal to or less, the effect selection image 81a may be displayed so that the player can select the reach type to be executed. As a result, it is possible to extend the time for the player to select the reach type to be executed. Further, in the shortest remaining time among the three reach types, the effect selection image 81a may be continuously displayed so that the player can select the reach type to be executed. This also allows the player to extend the time during which the reach type desired to be executed can be selected to the extent possible.

  In addition, instead of displaying the transition effect image during the remaining time, a change effect digest of the selected reach type may be displayed during the remaining time. Thereby, a player's expectation with respect to the variation effect to be displayed can be enhanced.

Time required to display both super reach patterns and special reach pattern, or, the time required for displaying the special reach pattern is equal to or less than the value of the remaining variation time T ₅ after displaying the effect selected image Reach type When there are four or more, the MPU 231 selects three reach types from the four or more reach types, and displays a thumbnail image corresponding to the reach type on the effect selection image 81a. As a method for selecting the three leech type from four more than the reach type, it may be selected optionally three reach type, and remaining variation time T ₅ after the display effect select the image super reach pattern and Three reach types may be selected in order from the time required to display both the special reach patterns or the time required to display the special reach patterns. In addition, among the four or more reach types, three reach types may be selected in descending order of appearance probability. Further, among the four or more reach types, three reach types may be selected in order from the lowest appearance frequency in the pachinko machine 10.

The remaining fluctuation time T ₅ after effect selected image display, the time required to display both super reach patterns and special reach pattern, or, in order of the difference between the time required for displaying the special reach pattern is small be selected three reach type, intolerable when displayed in the remaining variation time after effect selected image displaying the variations effect corresponding to the reach type selected T ₅ by the player from among the three reach type It takes less time. Therefore, switching to an image corresponding to the reach type selected by the player can be performed with a good tempo. Therefore, it can suppress that a player extends.

  In addition, if there are four or more reach types, and the three reach types are selected in descending order of the appearance probability, the player selects the reach type with the very low appearance probability, and the variable effect corresponding to the reach type. Can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the player can experience a special feeling by looking at the reach pattern with a very low appearance probability, and can increase the interest in the game.

  In addition, in the reach types of 4 or more, if the three reach types are selected in order from the lowest appearance number in the pachinko machine 10, the player selects the reach type in which the appearance number is very low in the pachinko machine 10. The variation effect corresponding to the reach type can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the player can enjoy a special feeling by looking at the reach pattern with a very low number of appearances in the pachinko machine 10 and can enhance the interest in the game.

  The character ROM 235 includes a character storage area 235a in which image data of each sprite such as a symbol (background symbol or decorative symbol) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored. In the character storage area 235a, in order to reduce the amount of data to be stored, the above-described image data is stored as compressed data. In the present embodiment, the image data before compression is composed of about 1024 Mbytes, and the image data of about 1024 Mbytes is compressed to about 768 Mbytes and stored in the character storage area 235a.

  The video RAM 236 is a memory having two frame buffer areas for storing an image for one frame displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The image controller 236 generates image data for one frame according to the drawing list, writes the image data in one frame buffer area of the video RAM 236, and image data for one frame written in the other frame buffer area of the video RAM 236. And the read image data is output to the third symbol display device 81 via the output port 239, whereby a plurality of frame images are continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The image controller 237 reads the sprite image data (compressed image data) defined in the drawing list from the character storage area 235a according to the order described in the drawing list, decompresses the image data, and draws the image data. Processing is performed in accordance with the drawing information defined in the list, and the image data of the sprite is written into one frame buffer area of the video RAM at the display position coordinates specified in the drawing list. Image data to be displayed in one frame is generated by decompressing, processing, and writing image data for all sprites defined in the drawing list.

  The writing of the image data for one frame to the one frame buffer area and the reading of the image data for one frame from the other frame buffer area are performed in parallel, and both are completed in 20 milliseconds. When the reading of the image data for one frame from the other frame buffer area is completed, the image data for one frame previously written from one frame buffer area is then read, while the other The next one frame of image data is written into the frame buffer area.

  In this manner, by alternately writing image data and reading image data in one frame buffer area and the other frame buffer area, a plurality of frame images are continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be displayed.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a startup process periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 2 milliseconds). There are a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described first, and then the startup process and the main process will be described.

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process that is repeatedly executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. When the MPU 201 executes this timer interrupt process, various processes to be executed periodically are performed.

  In the timer interruption process, first, reading processes of various winning switches are executed (S1101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the counter buffer 202 b of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (250 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Is stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S1103). Specifically, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1 and their counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment, When 899, 99, 99, 250) are reached, each is cleared to 0. The updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203.

  Next, a process for performing display by the first symbol display device 37 and a variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are executed (S1104), and then the first entrance port. 64 and a start winning process associated with winning in the second entrance 640 is executed (S1105). Details of the variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process is executed, the firing control process is executed (S1107), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S1108), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the launch control process, the ball is fired on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process for determining ON / OFF of. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Next, the start winning process (S1105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S1105). The start winning process (S1105) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 18), and it is determined whether or not there is a win (start winning) at the first ball inlet 64 and the second ball inlet 640. When there is a winning, a holding process of values indicated by various random number counters and a counting process of the number of held balls are executed.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a first winning slot 64 (start winning) (S1201). Here, the entrance to the first entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, if it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S1201: Yes), the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball counter 203d (the variation effect accompanying the start winning to the first entrance 64 is shown). It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls NA) is less than an upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S1202). Then, there is no winning at the first entrance 64 (S1201: No), or even if there is a win at the first entrance 64, the variation effect accompanying the start winning at the first entrance 64 is provided. If the number of reserved balls NA <4 is not satisfied (S1202: No), the process proceeds to S1206.

  On the other hand, if there is a winning at the first entrance 64 (S1201: Yes), and if the number of reserved balls NA <4 of the fluctuating effect accompanying the start winning at the first entrance 64 (S1202: Yes). 1 is added to the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of held balls NA) (S1203), and further, a first per-random number counter C1, a first per-type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter Each value of CS1 is stored in the first area among the empty reserved areas in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S1204).

  Next, the special figure 1 reserved ball number command including the value of the reserved ball number NA of the fluctuating effect accompanying the start winning to the first entrance 64 updated by the processing of S1203 is set (S1205). Transition to processing. The special figure 1 reserved ball number command is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the process of S1701 of the main process (FIG. 24). In the voice lamp control device 113, the ball holding ball in the voice lamp control device 113 is based on the number of held balls NA of the fluctuating effect accompanying winning in the first entrance 64 included in the special figure 1 reserved ball number command. Manage numbers.

  In the subsequent process of S11206, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (start prize) at the second entrance 640 (S1206). Here, a ball entering the second ball inlet 640 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the second entrance 640 (S1206: Yes), the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball counter 203e (the variation effect accompanying the start winning to the second entrance 640) It is determined whether or not the number of retained balls NB) is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S1207). Then, there is no winning at the second entrance 640 (S1206: No), or even if there is a winning at the second entrance 640, the variation effect accompanying the start winning at the second entrance 640 If the number of held balls NB <4 is not satisfied (S1207: No), the start winning process is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  On the other hand, if there is a winning at the second entrance 640 (S1206: Yes), and the number of reserved balls NB <4 of the variation effect accompanying the start winning at the second entrance 640 (S1207: Yes). The value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203 (the number of held balls NB) is incremented by 1 (S1208), and further, a first per random number counter C1, a first per type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter Each value of CS1 is stored in the first area among the empty reserved areas in the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 (S1209).

  Next, the special figure 2 reserved ball number command including the value of the reserved ball number NB of the variable effect accompanying the start winning to the second entrance 640 updated by the processing of S1208 is set (S1210). End the process and return to the timer interrupt process. The special figure 2 reserved ball number command is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1701 of the main process (FIG. 24). In the voice lamp control device 113, the ball holding ball in the voice lamp control device 113 is based on the number of held balls NB of the variation effect accompanying the winning in the second entrance 640 included in the special figure 2 reserved ball number command. Manage numbers.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the fluctuation process (S1104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing this variation processing (S1104). This variation process (S1104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18) and controls the variation display performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

  In this variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is currently being hit (S1301). The jackpot includes the jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37 in the jackpot and the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game ends. As a result of the determination, if it is a big hit (S1301: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is not a big hit (S1301: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S1302), and if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing. (S1302: No) Next, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed after the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped (S1303). As a result, if the predetermined time has not elapsed after the fluctuation stop (S1303: No), this processing is terminated as it is. Thereby, since the stop symbol in the variation effect is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 for a predetermined time, the player can visually recognize the stop symbol.

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S1303, if the predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of the fluctuation (S1303: Yes), it means that the fluctuation effect of the first symbol (third symbol) can be started. First, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of reserved balls NB of the variation effect accompanying the start winning at the second entrance 640) is greater than 0 (S1304). As a result, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of reserved balls NB) is larger than 0 (S1304: Yes), the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of reserved balls NB) ) Is subtracted by 1 (S1305), and the data stored in the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S1306).

  In this data shift process, the data (each counter value) stored in the special figure 2 holding first area of the special figure 2 holding ball storage area 203b is shifted to the special figure holding ball execution area 203c. Hold 2nd area → Special figure 2 hold 1st area, Special figure 2 hold 3rd area → Special figure 2 hold 2nd area, Special figure 2 hold 4th area → Special figure 2 hold 3rd area, etc. Data in each area (each counter value) is shifted.

  After the data shift process, the special figure type flag 203k is set to ON (S1307), and the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol) starting from now on is accompanied by the start winning to the second entrance 640. After indicating that it is to be executed, the fluctuation start process (S1308) in the first symbol display device 37B is executed, and this process is terminated. The variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  As a result of the processing of S1304, the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of held balls NB) is not larger than 0, that is, the number of held balls NB is 0, and the start winning to the second entrance 640 is made. If it is determined that there is no fluctuating variation effect associated with (S1304: No), then the value of the special figure 1 retention ball number counter 203d (the retention ball of the variation effect associated with the start winning to the first entrance 64) It is determined whether or not (number NA) is larger than 0 (S1309).

  As a result, the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (reserved ball number NA) is not larger than 0, that is, the held ball number NA is 0, and the hold associated with the start winning to the first entrance 64 is held. If it is determined that there is no changed presentation effect (S1309: No), it is determined whether or not the demonstration effect is being performed in the third symbol display device 81, that is, whether or not the demonstration effect is being performed. (S1317). In this determination process, after a demo command is transmitted to the display control device 114 via the sound lamp control device 113, the value of the retained ball number counter 203a (the number of retained balls N) is determined to be greater than zero. It is determined that the interval is being demonstrated.

  If it is determined that the demo is not in progress (S1317: No), a demo command to be transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 is set (S1318), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the demonstration is in progress (S1317: Yes), the process returns to the timer interrupt process. The demo command set in the processing of S1318 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S1701 in FIG. 24) of the timer interrupt processing to be executed next, It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the demo command as it is to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 performs control so as to display a demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the demo command.

  Here, as described above, the demo command is set when there is no holding ball when a predetermined time elapses after the fluctuation is stopped. Therefore, if the change display is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of the change, a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As a result of the processing of S1309, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (number of held balls NA) is larger than 0 (S1309: Yes), the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (hold) The number of balls NA) is decremented by 1 (S1310), and the data stored in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203d is shifted (S1311).

  This data shift process shifts data (each counter value) stored in the special figure 1 holding first area of the special figure 1 holding ball storage area 203a to the special figure holding ball execution area 203c. Reservation 2nd area → Special Figure 1 Reservation 1st Area, Special Figure 1 Reservation 3rd Area → Special Figure 1 Reservation 2nd Area, Special Figure 1 Reservation 4th Area → Special Figure 1 Reservation 3rd Area, etc. Data in each area (each counter value) is shifted.

  After the data shift process, the special figure type flag 203k is set to OFF (S1312), and the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol) starting from now on is accompanied by the start winning at the first entrance 64. After indicating that it is to be executed, the process proceeds to the process of S1308, the fluctuation start process in the first symbol display device 37 is executed, and this process is terminated.

  In this variation process, when it becomes possible to start the variation effect (S1303: Yes), first, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S1304). ), When the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball counter 203e is larger than 0, that is, when the variation effect accompanying the start winning to the second entrance 640 is held (S1304: Yes), the special figure Regardless of the value of the 1-holding ball number counter 203d, that is, whether or not the fluctuating effect accompanying the start winning to the first entrance 64 is held, it is held in the special figure 2 holding ball storage area 203b. Based on the data (each counter value), the variation effect is started. As a result, the winning prize at the second entrance 640 is configured so that the big win lottery is performed in preference to the starting prize at the first entrance 64, and the variation effect is performed based on the big win lottery. Yes.

  In the processing of S1302, if it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S1302: Yes), it is determined whether or not the changing time has passed (S1313). The display time during fluctuation of the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time has elapsed. If not (S1313: No), the display of the 1st symbol display apparatus 37 is updated (S1314), and this process is complete | finished.

  In the present embodiment, for example, the currently lit LED is red from the LED 37b of the first symbol display device 37 or the LED 37Bb of the first symbol display device 37B until the variation time elapses after the variation starts. If there is, turn off the red LED and turn on the green LED. If the green LED is turned on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and turn on the blue LED. Then, a display mode is set in which the blue LED is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

  The variation process is executed every 2 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the variation process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once each time the variation process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  On the other hand, if the variation time of the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S1313: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S1315). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a change start process (S1308) described later with reference to FIG.

  That is, whether or not a big hit is determined by the process of S1308 according to the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special figure reservation ball execution area 203c, and if it is a big hit, the first hit type counter Depending on the value of C2, it will be a 15R probability variation jackpot (maximum number of rounds is a probability variation jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after a big round of 15 rounds) or a 4R probability variation jackpot (maximum number of rounds will be a high probability state after a jackpot of 4 rounds) It is determined whether the symbol will be a transition jackpot or a symbol that will be a 15R normal jackpot (a jackpot that transitions to a low probability state after the maximum number of rounds is a jackpot of 15 rounds).

  In the present embodiment, a blue LED is lit when the 15R probability change big hit is reached after the big hit, a red LED is turned on when the 4R probability change big hit is reached, and the red LED and the blue color are turned on when the 15R normal big hit is reached. Turn on the LED. Further, when it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, although the display of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  When the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the process of S1315, the stop symbol of the variation effect of the third symbol display device 81 is synchronized with the lighting of the LED in the first symbol display device 37. In this case, a confirmation command is set for confirmation (S1316), and this process is terminated. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives this confirmation command, it transmits the confirmation command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the variation time elapses, the third symbol display device 81 stops the variation, and the stop symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is confirmed by receiving the confirmation command.

  Next, the variation start process (S1308) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the change start process (S1308). This variation start process (S1308) is executed in the variation process (see FIG. 20) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18), and based on the values of various counters stored in the special figure holding ball execution area 203c. A lottery of “big hit” or “off” (big hit lottery) is performed, and an effect pattern (variable effect pattern) of a variable effect performed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is determined.

  In the variation start process, first, a big hit lottery process is performed to determine whether or not a big hit is made based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special figure holding ball execution area 203c (S1401). Whether or not it is a big hit is determined based on the relationship between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the gaming state at that time. As described above, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state (that is, normal and short time), “7,307,582” associated with the “low probability state” in the jackpot random number table 202a. "Is a jackpot random number value, and when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state (ie, probabilistic change)," 28, 58, 85 "associated with the" high probability state "in the jackpot random number table 202a. 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836 , 866, 892 "is the jackpot random value. In the process of S1301, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203c is compared with the jackpot random number value. Determine.

  If it is determined as a result of the processing of S1401 that it is a big hit (S1401: Yes), in order to set the display mode at the time of the big win, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure type flag 203k is on (S1402). ). Then, when the special figure type flag 203k is on (S1402: Yes), the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol) starting from now on is executed with the start winning to the second entrance 640. Therefore, as the jackpot type table 202b for determining the jackpot type, a jackpot type table (see FIG. 9B) for "second entrance" is set (S1403).

  On the other hand, when the special figure type flag 203k is off (S1402: No), the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol) starting from now on is executed with the start winning to the first entrance 64. Therefore, as the jackpot type table 202b for determining the jackpot type, a jackpot type table for the “first entrance” (see FIG. 9B) is set (S1404).

  Then, the jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type table set by the processing of S1403 or S1404 and the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the special figure holding ball execution area 203c. The display mode for the corresponding jackpot is set (S1405).

  In other words, the jackpot type selected by the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type table set by the processing of S1403 or S1404, that is, the 15R probability variable jackpot where the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after 15 rounds of jackpot Based on whether the maximum round number is a 4R probability variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after a big round of 4 rounds, or a 15R normal jackpot that transitions to a low probability state after a big round of 15 rounds The display mode of the display device 37 (the lighting state of the LED 37a) is set.

  Also, based on the transition state after the jackpot, in order to stop and display the jackpot symbols corresponding to various jackpots on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (15R probability variable jackpot, 4R probability variable jackpot, 15R normal jackpot) is the stop type Set as

  Here, when the jackpot is won with winning the first entrance 64, the jackpot type is ¼ according to the jackpot type table for the “first entrance” (see FIG. 9B). 15R probability variation jackpot with probability (= 25/100), 15R normal jackpot probability with 1/4 (= 25/100), and 4R probability variation jackpot with probability of 1/2 (= 50/100).

  On the other hand, in the case where a big hit is made in accordance with the winning at the second entrance 640, the jackpot type is ½ according to the jackpot type table for “second entrance” (see FIG. 9B). 15R probability variation jackpot with a probability of (= 50/100), 15R normal jackpot with a probability of 1/4 (= 25/100), and 4R probability variation jackpot with a probability of 1/4 (= 25/100).

  In this way, the probability of a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot that is selected when a jackpot is won is that the ball enters the first slot 64 when the ball enters the second slot 640. It is set higher than the ball. On the other hand, as described above, the second entrance 640 is accompanied by the electric accessory 640a, and the ease of entering the ball into the second entrance 640 depends on the open / close state of the electric accessory 640a. On the other hand, the first entrance 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second entrance 640, and the ball can enter at any time.

  Also, the person who fired the sphere so that the sphere passed to the left of the variable display unit 80 (the person who left-handed) fired the sphere so that the sphere passed to the right of the variable display unit 80. It is configured so that the ball can easily enter the first entrance 64 rather than the case (than when the player strikes the right side). On the other hand, the sphere was fired so that the sphere passed through the right side of the variable display device unit 80 (the person who hit right) fired the sphere so that the sphere passed through the left side of the variable display device unit 80. It is configured to make it easier for a ball to enter the second entrance 640 than in the case (than when left-handed). In addition, a through gate 67 that triggers a lottery to open the electric accessory 640a is disposed on the right side of the variable display device 80. Normally, even if a ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric gate is electrically operated. While the accessory 640a is unlikely to be in the open state, the electric accessory 640a is likely to be in the open state when the ball passes through the through gate 67 during the probability change or in the short time.

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessory associated with the second entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to enter the second entrance 640, so the first entrance without the electric accessory The ball is fired (left-handed) so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display unit 80 toward the mouth 64, and a lot of chances for lottery wins are obtained by entering the first entrance 64. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit. On the other hand, during the probability change or during the short time, the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is likely to be in an open state and is easy to enter the second entrance 640. Toward the right side of the variable display device 80, the ball is fired so that the ball passes (right-handed), and the goal is to hit 15R probability variation by hitting the second entrance 640, It is advantageous for the player.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment launches a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed between “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Thus, the player can be changed in the way the ball is hit, so that the game can be enjoyed.

  Next, a variation pattern (variation time) at the time of jackpot is determined (S1406). The determination of the variation pattern is based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether normal, short-running, or probability variation), the value of the variation type counter CS1, and the jackpot variation pattern table 202c (see FIG. 9C). Based on. When the variation pattern is set in the process of S1406, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set.

  If it is determined in step S1401 that the game is not a big hit (S1401: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S1407). In the processing of S1407, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the out-of-clock symbol, and based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area 203c. As the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is set whether it is front / rear detach reach, reach other than front / rear detachment, or complete detachment. In the present embodiment, as described above, the table is set so that the range of values corresponding to each stop pattern of the stop pattern selection counter C3 differs depending on whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. Yes.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S1408). This variation pattern is determined by the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (normal, short-running, or probability variation), the stop type set in the processing of S1302, the value of the variation type counter CS1, and the variation pattern for detachment. This is performed based on the table 202d (the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d1, the variation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d2). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S1408, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set.

  When the process of S1406 or the process of S1408 is completed, the variation pattern type determined in the process of S1406 or S1408 is changed to the special figure 1 (various effect accompanying the start winning to the first entrance 64) or the special figure 2 ( A variation pattern command to be notified to the display control device 114 is set including special figure type information indicating whether or not the variation effect accompanying the start winning at the second entrance 640 (S1409).

  Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S1405 or S1407 is set (S1410). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the process of S1701 of the main process (FIG. 24). The

  Next, with reference to FIG. 22, it is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU201 in the main controller 110. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt process. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203.

  That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S1551), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The above NMI interrupt process is executed in the same manner in the payout and emission control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 when the main control apparatus 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on.

  In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1601). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the sub-side control device (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be operable. (S1602). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1603).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1604). If it is turned on (S1604: Yes), the process proceeds to S1611. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S1604: No), it is further determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1605), and if not stored (S1605: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown has not been completed normally, the process proceeds to S1611 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1605: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1606). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1607: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process moves to S1611 even in such a case. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S1712 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the processing of S1611, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 as a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1611). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (working area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S1612, S1613) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S1612, S1613) is executed. Similarly, initialization processing (S1612, S1613) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S1612, S1613), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1612), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1613). After execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1610.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S1604: No), the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored (S1605: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S1607: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S1608). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power supply is shut off is transmitted (S1609), and the process proceeds to S1610. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S1610, an interrupt is permitted (S1610). And it transfers to the main process mentioned later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1701 to S1705 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S1708 and S1709 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is sent to each sub-control device (peripheral control device). ) Is executed (S1701).

  Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S1101 in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 18) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the number of balls acquired. Send a prize ball command. Also, the special figure 1 reserved ball number command and the special figure 2 reserved ball number command set in the start winning process (see FIG. 19) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  Furthermore, by this external output process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened and closed in the special pattern in the variation pattern command, the stop type command, the confirmation command and the special game state at the time of the big hit, which are necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 In this case, a command necessary for displaying various screens on the third symbol display device 81 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a sphere, a sphere launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1702). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1703), and then the special winning opening 65a is obtained when the special game state is a big hit. In accordance with the opening / closing operation (closing condition), a large opening opening / closing process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is executed (S1704).

  Next, a normal symbol control process for controlling the display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol, for example, “◯” or “x” symbol) by the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1705). Briefly, on the condition that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of the passage, and the second symbol display device 83 changes the second symbol. Display is performed. Immediately before the second symbol display is performed on the second symbol display device 83, the lottery of the second symbol is performed based on the acquired value of the second random number counter C4. Based on the result of the lottery, As a result of the change display of the two symbols, the symbol “◯” or “×” is stopped and displayed. When the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed and the second symbol is hit, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened for a predetermined time. On the other hand, when the symbol “x” is stopped and displayed, and the second symbol is removed, the electric accessory 640a is kept closed.

  In addition, in the lottery of the second symbol, different numbers are set as the random number values to be won depending on whether the gaming state is normal, short in time, or in probability change. In other words, there are 149 random number values that the game state is normal, and the value is “5 to 153”. That is, when the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 153”, it is determined that the game state is normal and is a win. On the other hand, there are 250 random number values that can be won when the game state is shorter or more likely, and the range is “1-250”. That is, when the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “1 to 250”, it is determined that the game state is winning when the gaming state is short-running or probable.

  In addition, the variation time of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is set to be shorter when the gaming state is shorter or more likely than when it is normal. Furthermore, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a when it is determined to be the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is released for a longer time when the gaming state is shorter or more likely than when it is normal.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is set to be higher during probability change and shorter time than in normal time. Further, in the present pachinko machine 10, the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is also set shorter during normal change and during shorter time than during normal. Thereby, during probability change and time reduction, the symbol “◯” is easily displayed in the variation display of the second symbol, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is opened (enlarged state) increases. On the other hand, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened also becomes longer than normal. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second entrance 640 during the probability change and during the short time compared to the normal time.

  Here, as described above, the probability of a big hit between the case where the ball enters the first entrance 64 and the case where the ball enters the second entrance 640 is a low probability state. Although it is the same even in a high probability state, the probability that the 15R probability variation jackpot is selected as the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is large, the probability that the ball enters the second slot 640 is the first slot It is set higher than the case where a ball enters 64. On the other hand, the 1st entrance 64 does not have the electric accessory 640a which exists in the 2nd entrance 640, and is in the state where a ball can always enter.

  Also, the person who fired the sphere so that the sphere passed to the left of the variable display unit 80 (the person who left-handed) fired the sphere so that the sphere passed to the right of the variable display unit 80. It is configured so that the ball can easily enter the first entrance 64 rather than the case (than when the player strikes the right side). On the other hand, the sphere was fired so that the sphere passed through the right side of the variable display device unit 80 (the person who hit right) fired the sphere so that the sphere passed through the left side of the variable display device unit 80. It is configured to make it easier for a ball to enter the second entrance 640 than in the case (than when left-handed). In addition, a through gate 67 that triggers a lottery when the electric accessory 640a is opened is disposed on the right side of the variable display device 80.

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessory associated with the second entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to enter the second entrance 640, so the first entrance without the electric accessory The ball is fired toward the mouth 64 so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”), and the chance to win a lottery is increased by entering the first entrance 64. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit. On the other hand, during the probability change and the short time, since the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is likely to be in an open state and easily enters the second entrance 640, the through gate 67 and the second entrance The ball is fired toward the ball entrance 640 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and the ball enters the second entrance 640 and the 15R probability variable big hit is obtained. It is advantageous for the player to aim for.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment launches a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed between “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Thus, the player can be changed in the way the ball is hit, so that the game can be enjoyed.

  After the processing of S1705, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1706). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1706: No), the power failure monitoring circuit The power failure signal SG1 is not output from 252 and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S1707). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S1707: Yes), the process proceeds to S1701, and the processes after S1701 described above are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S1707: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the next main process execution timing. The updating of the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S1708, S1709).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1708). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899, 250 in this embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1702 (S1709).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1701 to S1705 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random. Similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In the processing of S1706, if the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1706: Yes), the power supply is shut down due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power outage signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 22 has been executed, the power-off process after S1710 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1710), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S1711). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1712), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1713), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1706 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1701 to S1705 ends, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1708 and S1709 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. The process can be started from S1701. In other words, the process can be started from the process of S1701 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutdown, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved to the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved in the initial setting process (S1601) without saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1701. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1801). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off process flag is turned on, the power-on process of S1920 (see FIG. 26) is performed due to an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”). ) Is determined during execution (S1802). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 26, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1917 in FIG. 26), it executes a power-off process in S1920. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1920 is in the middle of execution can be determined based on the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1802: No), the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure has occurred and the power-off process in S1920. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1803).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1806. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1803: Yes), the process proceeds to S1804, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1803: No), the process proceeds to S1808.

  On the other hand, if the power-off process flag is on (S1802: Yes), this startup process is performed after an instantaneous power failure and during the execution of the power-off process at S1820, the sound lamp control is performed. The MPU 221 of the device 113 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1804, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1804, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1804). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1805: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1806). Transition to processing. By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in the specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1805: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1807), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the processing of S1808, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1808). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S1920 is executed (see S1919 in FIG. 26). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1920 is executed, the startup process this time is the moment when the power-off flag is turned on. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1920 is completed. Accordingly, in such a case (S1808: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1809), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1810), and an interrupt is performed. The permission is set (S1811), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, when the power-off flag is turned off, the process of S1808 is reached because the current start-up process is started after, for example, the power supply is completely shut down, so that the process of S1808 is performed via the processes of S1804 to S1806. This is a case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1808: No), S1809, which is the work area clear process of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1810, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1810), and interrupt permission is set. In step S1811, the process proceeds to the main process.

  The reason for skipping the clear process in S1809 is that when the process from S1804 to S1808 is reached via the process in S1806, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S1804. When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing this main process.

  When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the process of S1901 is executed for the first time after the main process is started, or whether or not one millisecond or more has elapsed since the process of S1901 was executed last time. (S1901) If 1 millisecond or more has not elapsed (S1901: No), the process proceeds to S1913 without performing the processes in S1902 to S1912.

  In S1901, whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed is determined in S1902 to S912 in relation to display (production), whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the variable display process of S1913, the main command determination process of S1915, and the display command determination process of S1916 in a short cycle.

  By executing the main command determination process of S1915 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception of a command transmitted from the main control device 110 from being missed. By executing the display command determination process of S1916 at a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of a command transmitted from the display control device 114. Further, by executing the fluctuation display process of S1913 in a short cycle, the setting related to the fluctuation effect can be performed without delay based on the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command received by the main command determination process.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S1901 (S1901: Yes), first, various commands for the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S1903 to S1916 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 ( S1902). Subsequently, the output of each lamp is set so that the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 is set or the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1909 described later (S1903), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1904). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1905 without performing notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S1905, a customer waiting effect is executed (S1905). In the customer waiting effect, when a time during which the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player has elapsed for a predetermined time, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command as a display control device. 114.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1907). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player on the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  Further, when the frame effect is not executed or when the frame button 22 is pressed during the high-speed variation period, a process for changing the stage is performed, and the rear image change for the display control device 114 is performed instead of the frame button operation command. Set the command. By including information on the type of the back image corresponding to the stage after the change in the back image change command, the display control device 114 displays the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as an image corresponding to the stage. Processing to change to is performed. In addition, when a notice character appears at the start of fluctuation display, the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation is displayed by pressing the frame button 22, or the expectation of the jackpot is displayed by pressing the frame button 22 during reach production. It is good also as a decision button for changing to the production | presentation which can have, or selecting the reach | reduction effect of the frame button 22 among several reach productions. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S1907 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, various solenoids and various motors provided in the first accessory 87 to the third accessory 89 are driven according to the accessory drive control data, and the first accessory 87 to the third An accessory driving process for operating the accessory 89 is executed (S1908).

  Next, lamp editing processing is executed (S1909), and then sound editing / output processing is executed (S1910). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the sound data is decoded according to the display type command from the display control device 113 so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the decoded sound is output from the sound output device 226. . When an alarm sound output is set, an alarm sound is output from the sound output device 226 by this sound editing / output process.

  After the process of S1910, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1911). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. Based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process, the lamp editing process in S1909 is executed. Note that the sound editing / output process of S1910 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81. After the process of S1911, a counter update process is executed (S1912), and the process proceeds to S1913. In the counter update process, various counters used by the MPU 221 are updated.

  In the process of S1913, in order to display the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are generated based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command received from the main control device 110. Then, a variable display process, which is a process for setting these generated commands to be transmitted to the display control device 114, is executed. Details of this variation display processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the variable display process, a main command determination process is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 (S1915). Details of the main command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. After the main command determination process, a display command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the display control device 114 is performed (S1916). Details of the display command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S1916 is completed, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1917). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1917 (S1917: Yes), both the power shutdown flag and the power shutdown processing flag are turned on (S1919), and the power shutdown processing is executed (S1920). After executing the power-off process, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1921), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the information on occurrence of power interruption is not stored in the process of S1917 (S1917: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1918), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1918: No), the process returns to the process of S1901, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1918: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, the main command determination process (S1915) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the main command determination process (S1915). This main command determination processing (S1915) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. Then, processing corresponding to the received command is performed. Details of the main command determination process will be described below.

  In the main command determination process, first, the first command received from the main control device 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the main control command storage area provided in the RAM 223 and analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110. Is determined (S2000). If it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S2000: Yes), the variation pattern type of the variation effect to be started from the variation pattern command (normal reach various types, super reach various types, special reach various types, short deviation, long (Ex.) Is extracted (S2001), and it is further shown whether the variation effect is associated with the start winning at the first entrance 64 or the start winning at the second entrance 640. The special figure type information is extracted from the variation pattern command (S2002), and the process returns to the main process.

  The variation pattern type and special figure type information extracted here are stored in the RAM 223. The variation pattern type is used when setting a variation pattern command for display for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type in the variation display process (see FIG. 28) described later. . Further, the special figure type information is obtained when the value of either one of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b is decreased by 1 in accordance with the start of the variable effect in the fluctuation display process. To be referenced.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that a variation pattern command has not been received (S2000: No), it is then determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2003). If it is determined that the stop type command has been received (S2003: Yes), the fluctuation start flag is set to ON (S2004), and the stop type indicated by the stop type command (15R probability variation per unit, 4R probability variation per unit, 15R The normal jackpot, complete miss, front / rear reach, reach other than front / rear reach) are extracted and stored in the RAM 233 (S2005). Then, the main command determination process ends, and the process returns to the main process.

  By setting the variation start flag to ON, the start of the variation effect is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is caused to start the variation effect. The stop type is a display stop for notifying the stop symbol in order to determine the stop symbol of the variation effect to be started and to display the stop symbol with the determined stop symbol in the later-described variation display process (see FIG. 28). Used when setting a type command.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S2003: No), it is then determined whether or not a special figure 1 reserved ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2006). If it is determined that the special figure 1 reserved ball number command has been received (S2006: Yes), the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 included in the special figure 1 reserved ball number command (ie, , The number of suspended balls of the fluctuating effect accompanying the start winning to the first entrance 64, which is held in the main controller 110, is extracted, and this is stored in the special figure 1 held ball counter 223a of the voice lamp controller 113. Store (S2007).

  Then, the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is notified to the display control apparatus 114 as the number of third stage variation effects held in the main controller 110 based on the entry into the first entrance 64. The display special figure 1 reserved ball number command for setting is set (S2008), the main command determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process. The display special figure 1 reserved ball number command set here is transmitted to the display control device 114. When receiving the display special figure 1 reserved ball number command, the display control device 114 displays the retained ball number symbols (● symbols) corresponding to the number of reserved balls indicated by the display special figure 1 reserved ball number command as the third symbol display. The information is displayed in the first hold display area Ds1 of the device 81.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 reserved ball number command has not been received (S2006: No), it is then determined whether or not the special figure 2 reserved ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2009). ). If it is determined that the special figure 2 reserved ball number command has been received (S2009: Yes), the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110 included in the special figure 2 reserved ball number command (ie, , The number of suspended balls of the fluctuating effect accompanying the start winning to the second entrance 640, which is reserved in the main controller 110, is extracted and is stored in the special figure 2 reserved ball counter 223 b of the voice lamp controller 113. Store (S2010).

  Then, the value of the special figure 2 retained ball number counter 223b is notified to the display control apparatus 114 as the number of the 3rd symbol variation effects held in the main controller 110 based on the entry into the second entrance 640. The display special figure 2 reserved ball number command for setting is set (S2011), the main command determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process. The display special figure 2 reserved ball number command set here is transmitted to the display control device 114. When receiving the display special figure 2 reserved ball number command, the display control device 114 displays the retained ball number symbols (● symbols) corresponding to the number of reserved balls indicated by the display special figure 2 reserved ball number command as the third symbol display. The information is displayed in the second hold display area Ds2 of the device 81.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 reserved ball number command has not been received (S2009: No), it is then determined whether another command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2012). If no other command has been received (S2012: No), the main command determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, if another command has been received (S2012: Yes), the process according to the other command is executed (S2013), the main command determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the fluctuation display process (S1913) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing this variation display processing (S1913). This variation display processing (S1913) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and the variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as described above. Therefore, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are generated based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command received from the main controller 110, and the generated display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are generated. Is set to be transmitted to the control device 114.

  In the variation display process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S2101). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag is not on (that is, it is off) (S2101: No), the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are not received from the main controller 110. The fluctuation display process is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation start flag is on (S2101: Yes), the variation start flag is turned off (S2102), and then the variation pattern command in the process of S2102 of the main command determination process (see FIG. 27). The variation pattern type (various reach, super-reach, special reach, short out, long out) in the extracted variation effect and the stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command in the processing of S2105. And obtained from the RAM 223 (S2103).

  Next, a display variation pattern command for notifying the extracted variation pattern to the display control device 114 is generated and set for transmitting the command to the display control device 114 (S2105). Further, a display stop type command for notifying the extracted stop symbol to the display control device 114 is generated, and set to transmit the command to the display control device 114 (S2106).

  By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 starts display control of the variation effect so that the third symbol display device 81 displays the variation of the third symbol. At this time, a detailed variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. In addition, when the display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, based on the stop type indicated by the display stop type command, the display control device 114 confirms and displays the variation effect started by the display variation pattern command. The stop symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined.

  Here, the variation pattern type notified by the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 defines only the variation time, but the display control device 114 provides various detailed variations prepared for the variation time. One variation pattern is selected from the patterns, and the selected variation pattern is determined as a detailed variation pattern of the variation effect to be executed. Further, the stop types notified by the stop type command from the main control device 110 indicate rough stop types such as 15R probability variation big hit, 4R probability variation big hit, 15R normal big hit, complete loss, front / rear outreach, reach other than front / rear outreach. The display control device 114 determines a stop symbol that matches the stop type.

  Next, in accordance with the setting of the display variation pattern command, the sound lamp control device 113 manages the reserved ball as it is consumed (that is, the variation effect corresponding to the reserved ball is set). In order to reduce the number of held balls, first, from the special figure type information extracted in the process of S2002, it is determined whether or not the fluctuating effect to be started this time is associated with the start winning to the first entrance 64, that is, special figure 1. (S2107), if it is a fluctuation according to the special figure 1 (S2107: Yes), the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is decremented by 1 (S2108).

  Then, the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is notified to the display control apparatus 114 as the number of third stage variation effects held in the main controller 110 based on the entry into the first entrance 64. The display special figure 1 reserve ball number command for setting is set (S2109), the fluctuation display process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process. The display special figure 1 reserved ball number command set here is transmitted to the display control device 114. When receiving the display special figure 1 reserved ball number command, the display control device 114 displays the retained ball number symbols (● symbols) corresponding to the number of reserved balls indicated by the display special figure 1 reserved ball number command as the third symbol display. The information is displayed in the first hold display area Ds1 of the device 81.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S2107, when it is determined that the variation effect to start this time is associated with the start winning at the second entrance 640, that is, the variation according to the special drawing 2 (S2107: No). Then, 1 is subtracted from the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 202b (S2110). Then, the value of the special figure 2 retained ball number counter 223b is notified to the display control apparatus 114 as the number of the 3rd symbol variation effects held in the main controller 110 based on the entry into the second entrance 640. The display special figure 2 reserved ball number command for setting is set (S2111), the variation display process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process. The display special figure 2 reserved ball number command set here is transmitted to the display control device 114. When receiving the display special figure 2 reserved ball number command, the display control device 114 displays the retained ball number symbols (● symbols) corresponding to the number of reserved balls indicated by the display special figure 2 reserved ball number command as the third symbol display. The information is displayed in the second hold display area Ds2 of the device 81.

  Next, a display command determination process (S1916) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the display command determination process (S1916). In the display command determination process (S1916), as described above, the command received from the display control device 114 is determined, and the process corresponding to the received command is performed. Details of the display command determination process will be described below.

  In the display command determination process, first, from the display control command storage area provided in the RAM 223, the first command received from the display control device 114 among unprocessed commands is read and analyzed, and the display type command is received from the display control device 110. Is determined (S2201). If it is determined that the display type command has been received (S2201: Yes), the display content (display type) to be displayed in the third symbol display device 81 is extracted from the received display type command (S2202). Then, a setting for reading out the audio data corresponding to the display content from the ROM 222 is performed, the reproduction of the audio is started (S2203), and the display command determination process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the display type command has not been received as a result of the processing of S2201 (S2201: No), it is then determined whether or not an accessory operation start command has been received from the display control device 114 (S2204). ). If it is determined that an accessory operation start command has been received (S2204: Yes), the type of the movable accessory to be operated indicated by the accessory operation start command and its operation mode are extracted (S2205). Then, it reads out the accessory driving control data corresponding to the extracted movable accessory type and operation mode from the ROM 222, and drives the solenoid or motor provided in the movable accessory according to the accessory driving control data. (S2206). Then, the display command determination process ends.

  As a result of the process of S2204, when it is determined that the accessory operation start command has not been received (S2204: No), it is then determined whether another command has been received from the display control device 114 (S2207). . If no other command is received (S2207: No), the display command determination process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, if another command has been received (S2207: Yes), the process according to the other command is executed (S2208), the display command determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process.

  Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. The MPU 231 is broadly divided into a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt process that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and a V interrupt signal detected by the MPU 231. There is a V-interrupt process executed in the case of The V interrupt signal is a signal transmitted from the image controller 237 to the MPU 231. The image controller 237 transmits a V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds for completing the image drawing process for one frame. To do.

  The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, a main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  In this main process, an initial setting process is executed (S2401). Specifically, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233 and the video RAM 236 is performed. Various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for the respective flags.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, the pachinko machine 10 is checked by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the start is normally started.

  After the processing of S2401, interrupt permission is set (S2402). Thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thereby, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2402, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2501), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by a command determination process of a V interrupt process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 31B, a V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 31B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. A list (see FIG. 16) is created, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237, thereby instructing the image controller 237 to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V-interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when image rendering processing for one frame is completed in the image controller 237 and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt process will be described first, and then the details of each process will be described with reference to other drawings. In the V interrupt process, first, a command determination process (S2602) is executed, and then a display setting process (S2603) is executed. In the command determination process (S2602), the contents of the command stored in the command buffer area are analyzed, and the process according to the command is executed. For example, when a display variation pattern command is stored in the command buffer area, a detailed variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern type indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the detailed variation pattern is supported. The display data table for change is read from the display data table storage area 232a and set in the display data table buffer 233a.

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the main control device 110 determines the start of the change effect, there is a high possibility that the display change pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are stored in the command buffer area in 20 milliseconds. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at a time, it is possible to quickly grasp the aspect such as the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113, and to produce the effect image corresponding to the aspect. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the symbol display device 81. Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S2603), the address specified by the pointer 233c is defined based on the contents of the display data table and the additional data table set in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table buffer 233b by the command determination process (S2602). According to the drawn contents, the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 are specifically specified.

  Further, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table set in the additional data table buffer 233b, the display contents (to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from now on at the address indicated by the pointer 233c ( 13 is defined, a display type command for notifying the display content to the sound lamp control device 113 is generated, and a process for transmitting the generated display command to the sound lamp control device 113 is performed.

  In addition, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table set in the additional data table buffer 233b, if the accessory driving information is defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233c, In accordance with the accessory driving information, a process for generating an accessory operation start command including information on a movable accessory type to be started from now on and information on its operation mode and transmitting the command to the sound lamp control device 113 is performed. .

  Further, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process (S2603) is executed, a task process is then executed (S2604). In this task process, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is determined based on the content of the next one frame image to be displayed on the third display device 281 specified by the display setting process (S2603). In addition to specifying, for each sprite, various parameters necessary for drawing such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S2605). In this drawing process, the drawing list shown in FIG. 16 is generated from the types of sprites constituting one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite determined in the task process (S2604). Transmit to the image controller 237. Thereby, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2606). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the processing of S2606, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol, for example, in addition to the one notification lottery counter 233f. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. When reception of a display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (other than 15R probability variation big hit, 2R probability variation big hit, 15R normal big hit, front / rear out of reach, out of front / rear out) The stop type table corresponding to the reach (completely missed) and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the changing effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 32 to 36, details of the above-described command determination process (S1402), which is one process of the V interrupt process, will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the command determination process. The command interrupt process is executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114.

  In this command determination process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2701). If there is no unprocessed new command (S2701: No), the command determination process is terminated. Return to V interrupt processing. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2701: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S2603) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2702), and then The command types of all unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area are analyzed (S2703).

  In the unprocessed command, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display special figure 1 reserved ball number command or a display special figure 2 reserved ball number command (S2704). If there is a number command or display special figure 2 reserved ball number command (S2704: Yes), the held ball number command process is executed (S2705), and the process returns to S2701.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 33A, details of the reserved ball number command processing (S2705) will be described. FIG. 33A is a flowchart showing the reserved ball number command processing. This reserved ball number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display special figure 1 reserved ball number command or the display special figure 2 reserved ball number command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the reserved ball number command processing, first, the new reserved ball number command flag is turned on (S2801). The display reserve series command flag is a flag for notifying the display setting process (S2603) that the display hold ball number command has been processed in the ON state. Next, the reserved ball number information included in the display special figure 1 reserved ball number command or the display special figure 2 reserved ball number command is used for the special figure 1 (variation effect accompanying the start winning to the first entrance 64). It is acquired in association with the number of reserved balls or the number of reserved balls for the special figure 2 (variation effect accompanying the start winning to the second entrance 640) (S2802).

  In the process of S2802, if two or more display special figure 1 reserved ball number commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stored ball number information is obtained from the last stored special figure 1 reserved ball number command. get. Thereby, the reserve ball number information with respect to the latest special figure 1 can be acquired. Similarly, if two or more display special figure 2 reserved ball number commands are stored in the command buffer area, the reserved ball number information is acquired from the display special figure 2 reserved ball number command stored last. Thereby, the reserve ball number information for the latest special figure 2 can be acquired.

  Of the number determination flags provided for each number of reserved balls for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, when the number of reserved balls for the special figure 1 is acquired in the process of S2802, it corresponds to the number of reserved balls. While turning on the number determination flag in FIG. 1 and turning off the number determination flag in FIG. 1 corresponding to the number of other reserved balls (S2803), the process returns to the command determination process. When the number of reserved balls for the special figure 2 is acquired in the process of S2802, the number discrimination flag of the special figure 2 corresponding to the number of reserved balls is turned on, and the special figure 2 corresponding to the other number of reserved balls is also displayed. The number determination flag is turned off (S2803), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the new reserved ball number command flag is ON, the number determination flag in FIG. 1 and the number determination flag in FIG. 2 are referred to correspond to the number determination flag set to ON. The reserved image data is developed so that the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls to be displayed is displayed in the first reserved display area Ds1 for the special figure 1 and in the second reserved display area Ds2 for the special figure 2.

  Returning to FIG. 32, if it is determined in the processing of S2704 that neither the display special figure 1 reserved ball number command nor the display special figure 2 reserved ball number command is present (S2704: No), then, among the unprocessed commands, Whether there is a display confirmation command (S2706). If there is a display confirmation command (S2706: Yes), the confirmation command processing is executed (S2707), and the process returns to S2701.

  Here, the details of the confirmation command process (S2707) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33B is a flowchart showing the confirmation command process. This confirmation command process executes a process corresponding to the display confirmation command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the confirmation command process (S2707), the confirmation command flag is set to ON (S2811), and this process ends. The confirmation command flag is a flag for notifying the display setting process (S2603) that the display confirmation command has been received in the ON state. In the display setting process, the state of the confirmed command flag is monitored, and when the flag is turned on, the display setting process is executed so that the display of the confirmed display effect is started on the third symbol display device 81. . In addition, after processing the setting of the display of the variation effect, if the confirmed command flag does not turn on even after the effect time set for the variation effect has elapsed, the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the display setting process is executed.

  Returning to FIG. 32, if it is determined in the process of S2706 that there is no display confirmation command (S2706: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display demo command among the unprocessed commands ( If there is a display demonstration command (S2708) (S2708: Yes), the demonstration command processing is executed (S2709), and the processing returns to S2701.

  Here, the details of the demo command process (S2709) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33C is a flowchart showing the demo command process. This demo command process is to execute a process corresponding to the display demo command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the demonstration command processing (S2709), first, a demonstration display data table corresponding to the demonstration effect is selected from the display data table storage area 232a and set in the display data table buffer 233a (S2821). Next, null data is written into the additional data table buffer 233b to clear the contents (S2822).

  Next, time data corresponding to the demonstration effect is set in the time counter 233e (S2823), and the pointer 233c is initialized to 0 (S2824). Then, the confirmation command flag is set to OFF, the demonstration display flag is set to ON, and the confirmation display flag is set to OFF (S2825), and the process returns to the command determination process. The demonstration display flag is a flag indicating that a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the on state. The confirmed display flag is a flag indicating that the confirmed display effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the on state.

  By executing this demo command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233c initialized by the process of S2824, the display data table for demonstration set in the display data table buffer 233a by the process of S2821 is updated. Then, the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233c is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified. In the display setting process, the time of the demonstration effect defined in the display data table for demonstration is counted using the time counter 233e in which the time data corresponding to the demonstration effect is set by the process of S2823, and the process of S2825 is performed. Based on the state of the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag set by the above, when it is determined that the demonstration effect in the display data table for demonstration is ended by the timing of the display setting control time counter 233e, the effect to be displayed next Then, control is performed so that the demonstration effect is displayed again.

  Further, when both the confirmation command and the demo command are stored in the command buffer area at the start of execution of the command determination process, the above-described confirmation command process (S2707) is executed first, and the confirmation command flag is turned on. Then, the demo command process (S2709) is executed, and the confirmed command flag is turned off by the process of S2825.

  Thereby, in such a case, the demonstration effect is displayed without performing the final display effect. Main controller 110 is configured to transmit a demo command if it does not come to the start timing of the changing effect after a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) has elapsed after transmitting the confirmation command. When the execution of the command determination process is started, it is impossible for both the confirmed command and the demo command to be stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, when these commands are all stored in the command buffer area at the start of execution of the command determination process, there is a high possibility that the command transmission / reception is not normally performed.

  In such a case, since the display control device 114 gives priority to the demonstration effect that is not directly related to the game and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display it on the third symbol display device 81, the wrong fixed display effect is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thus, it is possible to suppress the player from misunderstanding the game result. In addition, since the demonstration effect is started without performing the final display effect, the player can easily recognize that an abnormality has occurred. Therefore, the player can immediately call a hall related person to request a countermeasure.

  Returning to FIG. 32, if it is determined in the process of S2708 that there is no display demo command (S2708: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands. If there is a display variation pattern command (S2710: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed (S2711), and the process returns to S2701.

  Here, the details of the variation pattern command process (S2711) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command process. This variation pattern command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the variation pattern command process, first, based on the variation pattern (variation time) indicated by the variation pattern command for display, one detailed variation pattern is executed from among a plurality of detailed variation patterns in which variation effects are executed in the variation time. A variation pattern is determined (S2831). The detailed variation pattern determined here uniquely determines the content of the announcement effect performed during the variation effect, and the operation modes of the second and third actors 88 and 89 operated by the announcement effect are uniquely determined. Determined.

  Next, a display data table necessary for displaying the determined detailed variation pattern on the 3rd symbol display device 81 includes a high-speed variation period, a stop display period, a normal variation period, a super reach period, a special reach period, etc. The determined display data table is determined for each period, and the determined display data table is stored in the display data table storage area 232a from the high-speed fluctuation storage area 232a1, the normal reach storage area 232a2, the super reach storage area 232a3, the special reach storage area 2332a4, etc. The data is read and set in the display data table buffer 233a (S2832).

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is displayed incorrectly. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S2832, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. The table is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If the display data table for change corresponding to the change pattern with a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the change effect having the change time shorter than the set display data table is actually controlled by the main control. When instructed by the device 110, the main controller 110 displays a confirmation command (display confirmation command) while displaying the variation effect according to the set variation display data table on the third symbol display device 81. ) Is received, and the changing third symbol is suddenly stopped and displayed, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, as in this embodiment, by setting the display data table for change corresponding to the change pattern with the shortest change time in the display data table buffer 233d, the display data table is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when a variation effect having a variation time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, a confirmation command from the main controller 110 is obtained. Until the display confirmation command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled so that the restart effect is displayed, so that the player visually recognizes the restart effect as part of the variable effect. Until the stop display of the 3rd symbol is confirmed, the variation of the 3rd symbol in the 3rd symbol display device 81 can be continuously observed without a sense of incongruity.

  Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the additional data table buffer 233b (S2833). Next, based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a by the process of S2832, time data representing the variation time is set in the time counter 233e (S2834). The pointer 233c is initialized to 0 (S2835), and the confirmation command flag, the demonstration display flag, and the confirmation display flag are all set to OFF (S2836).

  By setting the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag to OFF, it is possible to display the varying effect on the third symbol display device 81 instead of the demonstration effect or the confirmed display effect being displayed. Further, when both the confirmation command and the display variation pattern command are stored in the command buffer area at the start of execution of the command determination process, the above-described confirmation command process (S2707) is executed first, and the confirmation command flag Is set to ON, then, this variation pattern command process (S2711) is executed, and the confirmed command flag is turned OFF by the process of S2836.

  When the process of S2836 is completed, the restart timer counter used in the display setting process is initialized to 0 (S2837), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, the display data table for variation set in the display data table buffer 233a by the processing of S2832 while updating the pointer 233c initialized by the processing of S2835. The drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233c are extracted, and the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 are specified.

  Further, in the display setting process, using the time counter 233e in which the variation time data is set by the processing of S2834, the variation effect time defined in the variation display data table is counted, and the variation effect in the variation display data table is measured. If it is determined that the confirmation command has been completed, a confirmation display effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when a confirmation command (display confirmation command) from the main control device 110 is received. If the confirmation command (display confirmation command) cannot be received within a predetermined time after the end of the variation effect, the display setting is controlled so that the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, if both the display confirmation command and the display variation pattern command are stored in the command buffer area as unprocessed commands, if priority is given to the processing corresponding to the display confirmation command, the display Since the variation effect accompanying the variation pattern command is not performed, it is necessary to prioritize the processing corresponding to the variation pattern command for display. In contrast, in this command determination process, the presence / absence of the display confirmation command is determined first, so the confirmation command process corresponding to the display confirmation command is always executed first. The process corresponding to the change pattern command for use is executed later, and the fixed command flag set by the display fixed command can be set to off by overwriting as in the process of S2836. Therefore, the processing of the display variation pattern command can be prioritized over the display confirmation command, and the variation effect accompanying the display variation pattern command can be prioritized and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Similarly, if both the display demo command and the display variation pattern command are stored in the command buffer area as unprocessed commands, if priority is given to the processing corresponding to the display demo command, Since the variation effect accompanying the variation pattern command is not performed, it is necessary to prioritize the processing corresponding to the variation pattern command for display. On the other hand, in this command determination process, the presence / absence of the display demo command is determined first, so the demo command process corresponding to the display demo command is always executed first. The process corresponding to the change pattern command for execution is executed later, and the display data table for demonstration set in the display data table buffer 233a by the display demonstration command is rewritten to the display data table for change by overwriting as in the process of S2832. Can do. Therefore, the processing of the display variation pattern command can be prioritized over the display demo command, and the variation effect accompanying the display variation pattern command can be prioritized and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Returning to FIG. 32, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command in the processing of S2710 (S2710: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands. If there is a display stop type command (S2711: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S2713), and the process returns to S2701.

  Here, the details of the stop type command process (S2713) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35B is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display stop type command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the stop type command processing, first, stop type information indicated by the display stop type command (15R probability variation big hit, 4R probability variation big hit, 15R normal big hit, front / rear out, reach other than front / rear reach, complete out, or special stop symbol ) Is determined (S2841), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 31B) is executed. Thus, the stop symbol after the change effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set (S2842).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S2842 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are set. It is set to off (S2843).

  Here, as described above, in the display data table for change, the processing of S1642 is performed as type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the drawing content corresponding to the address after the predetermined time. The offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by is described. In the task process (S2604), after the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S2842 is identified from the stop symbol discrimination flag set in S2843, and the identification is performed. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the stopped symbol. Then, the address of the character storage area 234a in which image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified.

  In addition, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more display stop type commands stored in the command buffer area, part of the command will change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command will stop display for mistakenly. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2841, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stop type is assumed to be completely out of order, and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment is set by the processing of S2842. In such a case, the stop type table may be determined on the assumption that the stop type is a special stop symbol even when the stop type is completely off.

  Here, if a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is set, the jackpot stop symbol will be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is actually off. The player may misunderstand that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a big hit, which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as shown in this embodiment, by setting a stop symbol corresponding to complete losing, in fact, if it is a big hit, the stop symbol of complete detachment is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. However, since the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the jackpot state, the player can be pleased.

  After the process of S2843, it is then determined whether or not the stop symbol set in the process of S2842 is a jackpot symbol (S2844). In the processing of S2844, the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command (15R probability variation big hit, 4R probability variation big hit, 15R normal big hit, front / rear reach, reach other than front / rear reach, complete miss, special stop symbol) Based on the above, when the stop type information is either 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot or 15R normal jackpot, it may be determined whether or not the stop symbol becomes a jackpot symbol.

  As a result of the processing in S2844, if the symbol is not a jackpot symbol but a missing symbol (S2844: No), the stop type command processing is terminated as it is, and the processing returns to the command determination processing. On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S2844, if it is determined that the symbol is a jackpot symbol (S2844: Yes), then the value of the one notification lottery counter 233f is read (S2845), and one shot is made based on the read value. It is determined whether or not notification is made (S2846). If one notification is not performed (S2846: No), the stop type command process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the command determination process.

On the other hand, when one notification is performed (S2846: Yes), first, the one notification flag 233g is set to ON (S2847). Next, based on the value of the one notification lottery counter 233f, the start timing of one notification (time T ₁ from the start of the fluctuating effect until the execution of one notification is started) is determined and determined. The additional data table for one notification read from the additional data table 233c is set in the additional data table buffer 232c so that one notification is performed at the start timing (S2848).

  As a result, according to the accessory driving information of the first accessory 87 defined in the additional data table for one notification, the display operation device 114 issues the accessory operation start command of the first accessory at the start timing of one notification. To the sound lamp control device 113. Therefore, the first combination 87 is operated at the start timing of one notification, whereby one notification indicating that the player has a big hit with a probability of 100% is performed.

Next, in order to display an effect selected image 81a after the one shot announcement, the remaining variation time T ₅ after the display effect selected image, using the above-described (2), i.e., one-shot announcement is made variation The remaining variation time memory is obtained by calculating T ₅ = T ₀ −T ₁ −11 from the production variation time T ₀ and the one notification start time T ₁ determined by the one notification lottery counter 233f. It is stored in 233h (S2849).

Then, the required time for displaying both the super reach pattern and the special reach pattern specified in the reach combination table shown in FIG. 14 or the required time for displaying the special reach pattern is the calculated effect selection. from among the values within the reach type of residue variation time T ₅ after the display image, it selects three reach type (S 2850).

Here, the required time for displaying both the super reach pattern and the special reach pattern, or the required time for displaying the special reach pattern is equal to or less than the value of the remaining variation time T ₅ after the presentation selection image is displayed. When there are four or more reach types, in step S2850, three reach types are selected from the four or more reach types, and a thumbnail image corresponding to the reach type is displayed on the effect selection image 81a. As a method for selecting the three leech type from four more than the reach type, it may be selected optionally three reach type, and remaining variation time T ₅ after the display effect select the image super reach pattern and Three reach types may be selected in order from the time required to display both the special reach patterns or the time required to display the special reach patterns. In addition, among the four or more reach types, three reach types may be selected in descending order of appearance probability. Further, among the four or more reach types, three reach types may be selected in order from the lowest appearance frequency in the pachinko machine 10.

The remaining fluctuation time T ₅ after effect selected image display, the time required to display both super reach patterns and special reach pattern, or, in order of the difference between the time required for displaying the special reach pattern is small be selected three reach type, intolerable when displayed in the remaining variation time after effect selected image displaying the variations effect corresponding to the reach type selected T ₅ by the player from among the three reach type It takes less time. Therefore, switching to an image corresponding to the reach type selected by the player can be performed with a good tempo. Therefore, it can suppress that a player extends.

  In addition, if there are four or more reach types, and the three reach types are selected in descending order of the appearance probability, the player selects the reach type with the very low appearance probability, and the variable effect corresponding to the reach type. Can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the player can experience a special feeling by looking at the reach pattern with a very low appearance probability, and can increase the interest in the game.

  In addition, in the reach types of 4 or more, if the three reach types are selected in order from the lowest appearance number in the pachinko machine 10, the player selects the reach type in which the appearance number is very low in the pachinko machine 10. The variation effect corresponding to the reach type can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the player can enjoy a special feeling by looking at the reach pattern with a very low number of appearances in the pachinko machine 10 and can enhance the interest in the game.

  Following the processing of S2850, among the three reach types selected to be displayed on the effect selection image 81a, the reach type flag corresponding to one reach type is set on, and the other reach type flags are set off. (S2851). Here, the reach type flag is a flag provided for each reach type, the reach type flag corresponding to the reach type selected by the player in the effect selection image 81a is set to ON, and is not selected by the player. The reach type flag corresponding to the reach type is set to OFF. In the process of S2851, the reach type corresponding to one reach type from among the three reach types selected to be displayed on the effect selection image 81a as an initial state before the effect selection image 81a is displayed. Set only the flag on. As a result, when the effect selection image 81a is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after one announcement is made, the reach type in which the reach type flag is set to ON by the processing of S2851 is set as a temporary state. The player is selected.

Then, read from the performance selection storage area 232a5 of the display data table storage area 232a of the display data table for directing selective, and one shot notification start time T ₁ of the timing of displaying an effect selected image 81a (FIG. 17, one shot announcement execution time as T ₂ and the effect selected image 81a at the time) plus is displayed, overwriting the display data table for effect selection thus read out to the display data table buffer 233a (S2852). In addition, an additional data table for displaying thumbnail images corresponding to the three reach types selected to be displayed on the effect selection image 81a by the processing of S2850 in addition to the effect selection image 81a is displayed as an effect thumbnail. The data is read from the storage area 232c1 and set in the additional data table buffer 233b (S2853). Then, the stop type command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  After the one notification is executed by the processing of S2852 and S2853, the effect selection image 81a including the corresponding thumbnail images of the three selected reach types can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, after the player recognizes that it is a big hit with a probability of 100% by one notification, the player can recognize the three reach types displayed in the effect selection image 81a in the variation effect in which the one notification is made. The reach type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be selected within the time displayed in the effect selection image, and the image corresponding to the selected reach type is selected from the third symbol display device 81. Can be displayed.

  Here, as described above, one notification by the first accessory 87 is performed at an arbitrary timing when the variation effect is in the reach state. That is, as shown in FIG. 11, one notification is made at an arbitrary timing in the normal reach period, the super reach period, and the special reach period. That is, the normal reach period to the special reach period can all be referred to as a single notification occurrence period. The timing at which one notification is made is determined by the display control device 114 by the one notification lottery counter 233f described later.

  On the other hand, as described above, the one-shot notification is a notice effect indicating that the fluctuating effect in which the one-shot notification is performed is a big hit with a probability of 100%. If the change pattern of the change effect has a long change time such as super reach or special reach, the following problem may occur if one notification is made at an early stage such as a normal reach period.

  In other words, if a single announcement is made, the player can recognize that it is a big hit with a probability of 100% in the variation production, but even if one announcement is made, the variation time of the variation production is not shortened. As such, the player must wait for the jackpot until the variable time indicated by the main controller 110 has elapsed. In addition, a super-reach pattern or a special reach pattern that is expected to generate a jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even though the jackpot is fixed until the jackpot is generated. There is a risk of arousal. In addition, since the super reach period and the special reach period generally require a long time to enhance the interest of the player, the player may be bored.

  On the other hand, in the present pachinko machine 10, when one notification is made during one variation effect, the effect selection image 81a is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the variation effect after the one notification, and the effect is displayed. The player can select the reach type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from the three reach types whose thumbnail images are displayed in the selected image 81a. As a result, when one announcement is made in one variation effect, the variation effect can be performed with the reach pattern corresponding to the reach type that the player wants to watch until the player wins the variation effect. Therefore, it is possible to show the reach pattern image corresponding to the reach type that the player wants to watch to the player who has been found to be a big hit in the variation production by one notification, so the player's interest is maintained. However, the game can be continued by the player.

  In general, various reach types are prepared for the pachinko machine 10, but there are not a few reach patterns with a very low probability of appearance in order for the player to feel a special feeling. By making it possible to select a reach pattern with a very low appearance probability in the effect selection image 81a displayed after one announcement is made, the player can be shown a reach pattern with a very low appearance probability. Can do. Therefore, a player who has been found to be a big hit in the fluctuating performance with a single announcement can experience a special feeling by seeing a reach pattern with a very low appearance probability, and can enhance the interest in the game .

  Returning to FIG. 32, if it is determined in step S2712 that there is no display stop type command (S2712: No), it is then determined whether there is a frame button operation command among the unprocessed commands. If there is a frame button operation command (S2714: Yes), the frame button operation command process is executed (S2715), and the process returns to S2701.

  Here, the details of the frame button operation command processing (S2715) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing frame button operation command processing. This frame button operation command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the frame button operation command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the frame button operation command, a frame button operation flag indicating that the frame button has been operated in the ON state is set to ON (S2861), this process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when it is detected that the frame button 22 is operated while the effect selection image 81a is being displayed on the third symbol display device 281 based on the frame button operation flag set by the process of S2861, The process of changing the reach type selected by the user is executed. As a result, the player can select a desired reach type.

  Returning to FIG. 32, if it is determined in the process of S2714 that there is no accessory action non-execution command (S2714: No), then a process corresponding to another unprocessed command is executed (S2722). Return to processing.

  In the process of S2701, which is executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2701: Yes). ), The processing of S2702 to S2722 is executed again. Then, the processes in S2701 to S2722 are repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. If it is determined in S2701 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2701: No) ), The command determination process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 37 to 41, the details of the display setting process (S2603) described above, which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. First, FIGS. 37 and 38 are flowcharts showing the display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 37, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S2901). If the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S2901: No), In the command determination process executed first, it is determined that a new command has not been processed, the processes of S2902 to S2906 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S2909. On the other hand, if the new command flag is ON (S2901: YES), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after setting the new command flag to OFF (S2902), S2903 By each process of S2906, the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S2903, it is determined whether or not the new reserved ball number command flag is ON (S2903). If the new reserved ball number command flag is ON (S2903: Yes), the display is performed in the previous command determination process. It is determined that the special figure 1 reserved ball number command or the display special figure 2 reserved ball number command has been processed, and the reserved image setting process is executed (S2904).

  Here, the details of the hold image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the hold image setting process. In the reserved image setting process, the number of reserved balls for the number of reserved balls notified from the sound lamp control device 113 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the processing of the number of reserved balls for display. Therefore, it is a process for developing the image data.

  In the reserved image setting process, first, with reference to the number determination flag of FIG. 1 and the number determination flag of FIG. 2, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number determination flag of FIG. A reserved ball corresponding to the number determination flag of the special figure 2 in which the on-hold image data for displaying the several symbols in the first reserved display area Ds1 (see FIG. 5) of the third symbol display device 81 is set to ON is set. The reserved image data to be displayed in the second reserved display area Ds2 (see FIG. 5) of the number of reserved balls for several minutes in the second symbol display device 81 is developed (S2951). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the reserved image is specified based on the developed reserved image data, and the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle are drawn for each sprite. Determine the various parameters required.

  In the reserved image setting process, after the process of S2951, the new reserved ball number command is set to OFF (S2952), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Returning to FIG. 37, after the hold image setting process (S2904) or in the process of S2903, when it is determined that the new hold ball number command flag is not on, that is, is off (S2903: No), then , The process proceeds to S2905. In the process of S2905, it is determined whether or not the frame button operation flag is on (S2905). If the frame button operation flag is on (S2905), the frame button operation process is executed (S2906).

  Here, the details of the frame button operation process (S2906) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the frame button operation process. In this process, when the player operates the frame button 222 while displaying the effect selection image 81a after the first notification is made on the third symbol display device 281, the effect selection image is displayed according to the operation. This is a process for setting one reach type from among the three reach types displayed in 81a as the reach type selected by the player.

  In the frame button operation process, first, after setting the frame button operation flag to OFF (S2961), it is determined whether or not the effect selection image 81a is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (S2962). If the effect selection image 81a is displayed (S2962: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the one notification flag 233g is on (S2963). If the one notification flag 233g is on (S2963: Yes), the reach type flag is updated (S2964), the frame button operation process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process.

  As described above, the reach type flag is a flag provided for each reach type, and the reach type flag corresponding to the reach type selected by the player in the effect selection image 81a is set to ON and not selected by the player. The reach type flag corresponding to the reach type is set to OFF. In the processing of S2964, one of the two reach type flags that have been turned off is set to on and turned on for the reach type flags corresponding to the three reach types selected to be displayed on the effect selection image 81a. One reach type flag that has been set is set to OFF. Thus, each time the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the reach type selected by the player is changed among the three reach types selected to be displayed on the effect selection image 81a. Therefore, the player can select the reach type for viewing the image of the reach pattern in the subsequent variation effect from the three reach types displayed in the effect selection image 81a by operating the frame button 22. it can.

  If the one notification flag 233g is off as a result of the process of S2963 (S2963: No), the process of S2964 is skipped, the frame button operation process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. Here, the one notification flag 233g is set to OFF after 7 seconds from the display of the effect selection image 81a on the third symbol display device 81. Since the effect selection image 81a is displayed for 8 seconds, even if the frame button 22 is operated for the last 1 second, the processing of S2964 is skipped, and the player cannot select the reach type.

  In this embodiment, after the display of the display data table for displaying the reach pattern corresponding to the reach type selected by the player and the effect selection image 81a is finished in this last one second, the player A process of setting the display data table for displaying the transition effect image until the reach pattern corresponding to the selected reach type is displayed in the display data table buffer 233a is executed. Thus, after the display of the effect selection image 81a is finished, the transition effect image is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the transition effect image is displayed, it corresponds to the reach type immediately selected by the player. The reach pattern to be displayed can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  When the effect selection image 81a is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a result of the processing of S2962 (S2962: No), it corresponds to the frame button 22 in accordance with the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81a. After executing the processing (S2965), the frame button operation processing is terminated and the processing returns to the display setting processing.

  Returning to FIG. 37, after the frame button operation process (S2906) or in the process of S2905, if it is determined that the frame button operation flag is not on, that is, is off (S2905: No), then S2909 Move on to processing.

  In S2909, pointer update processing is executed (S2909). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update processing is performed by updating the pointer 233g that designates an address at which the corresponding drawing content is to be acquired from the display data table and the additional data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table buffer 233b. It is a process to perform.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233c (S2981). That is, the updating process is performed so that the pointer 233c is incremented by 1 every time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described in the address “0000H”, and the substance of each data is specified after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233c is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233a, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233c by the process of S2981, it is next determined whether or not the one notification flag 233g is on (S2982). As a result, one-shot notification flag 233g is If on (S2982: Yes), then whether or not less than the value the time counter 233e is obtained by adding the value of one second to the remaining fluctuation time _{T 5} after the display effect images Judgment is made (S2983). As a result, if the timing counter 233e is below the value obtained by adding the value of one second to the remaining fluctuation time _{T 5} after the display effect image (S2983: Yes), as shown in FIG. 17, the third symbol display device 81 It means that 7 seconds have elapsed since the display of the effect selection image 81a, that is, the display period of the effect selection image 81a is 1 second. In this case, first, the one notification flag 233g is set to OFF (S2984). As a result, when 7 seconds have passed since the effect selection image 81a is displayed, the player cannot select the reach type for the last one second of the effect selection image 81a even if the frame button 22 is operated. Yes.

Next, the time required to display the reach pattern corresponding to the reach type (reach type selected by the player) indicated by the reach type flag is read from the reach combination table (S2985), and after the effect selection image is displayed. the remaining fluctuation time T _5, from the difference between the required time required to display the reach pattern corresponding to the selected reach type by the player, and calculates the transition time for displaying the transition effect image (S2986) .

  Then, the display data table for displaying the transition effect image is set in the display data table buffer 233a for the transition time (S2987). After that, a display data table for displaying a reach pattern corresponding to the reach type (reach type selected by the player) indicated by the reach type flag is set in the display data table buffer 233a (S2988), and the process proceeds to S2989. Transition. Through the processing of S2987 and S2988, after the effect selection image 81a is displayed, the transition effect image is displayed, and the reach pattern corresponding to the reach type selected by the player is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As a result of the processing of S2982, when the one notification flag 233g is off (S2982: No), and even when the one notification flag 233g is on (S2982: Yes), the result of the processing of S2983 is a time counter. If 233e is greater than the value a value obtained by adding the 1 second to the remaining fluctuation time _{T 5} after the display effect image (S2983: No), it proceeds to step S2989.

  In the processing of S2899, it is determined whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233c in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a is End information (S2899). As a result, if it is End information (S2899: Yes), it means that in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a, the pointer 233c has been updated past the address where the entity data is described.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a is a demonstration display data table or a restart display data table (S2990), and the demonstration display data table or the restart display data is determined. If it is a table (S2990: Yes), the pointer 233c is set to 1 (S2991), and further corresponds to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table or restart display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a. The time data is set in the time counter 233e (S2992), and the process proceeds to S2994. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table or the restart display data table, so that the demonstration effect or the restart effect is repeated on the third symbol display device 81. Can be displayed.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2990, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a is neither the display data table for demonstration nor the restart display data table (S2990: No), the pointer 233c The value is subtracted by 1 (S2993), and the process proceeds to S2994. Thereby, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table and the restart display data table, for example, a display data table for change or a fixed display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233a. Since the drawing content of the previous address in which End information is written is always developed, the third image display device 81 displays the last image specified by the display data table in a stopped state. be able to.

  As a result of the processing of S2899, when it is determined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a that the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233c by the processing of S2981 is not End information (S2789: No) ), The process of S2990 to S2993 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2994.

  In the process of S2994, it is determined whether or not the confirmed command flag is on (S2994). If the confirmed command flag is not on but off (S2994: No), the pointer update process is terminated and display setting is finished. Return to processing. On the other hand, if the confirmation command flag is on (S2994: Yes), it means that a confirmation command (display confirmation command) has been received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113, so that the display data table buffer The value of the pointer 233c is set to a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the end position address where End information is stored in the display data buffer set to 233a (S2988), and the value of the time counter is set to 1. (S2989), the process returns to the display setting process. Thereby, when the confirmation command is received, the display setting process can expand the drawing content defined at the end of the set display data table and control the start of the confirmation display effect.

  Returning to FIG. 37, after the pointer update process, the address indicated by the pointer 233c updated by the pointer update process from the display data table and the additional data table set in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table buffer 233b. The drawing contents are expanded (S2910). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content developed in the processing of S2910 together with the pending image developed earlier, and the display coordinate position is determined for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing, such as a zoom ratio, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined. When Null data is described in the additional data table, the subsequent processing is executed assuming that there is no sprite to be added. When the additional data table buffer 233b is cleared with null data, the null data is always expanded from the additional data table buffer 233b.

  In the process of S2910, in the display data table and the additional data table set in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table buffer 233b, the display to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from now on at the address indicated by the pointer 233c. If the contents (see FIG. 13) are defined, a display type command for notifying the display contents to the sound lamp control device 113 is generated, and the generated display command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Thereby, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is notified with respect to the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 113. FIG. In the audio lamp control device 113, control is performed so that the audio output device 226 outputs audio corresponding to the display content notified by the display type command.

  Further, in the process of S2910, when the accessory driving information is defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233c in the display data table and the additional data table set in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table buffer 233b. Then, according to the accessory driving information, an accessory operation start command including information related to the movable accessory type whose operation is to be started and information related to the operation mode is generated and transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives this accessory action start command, each of the movable action objects indicated by the accessory action start command operates so as to operate in the operation mode indicated by the accessory action start command. Drives the solenoid and motor provided in the accessory.

  After the process of S2910, the value of the time counter 233e is decremented by 1 (S2911), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233e after the subtraction is 0 or less (S2912). If the value of the time counter 233e is 1 or more (S2912: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233e is 0 or less (S2912: Yes), it means that the effect time of the production corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a has passed. At this time, if the display data table for change is set in the display data table buffer 233a, a confirmation command (display confirmation command for display) is sent from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 at the end of the effect. ) Should be transmitted, so in the subsequent processing of S2913, it is confirmed whether or not the confirmed command flag is on (S2913).

  As a result, if the confirmation command flag is on (S2913: Yes), it means that the confirmation command (confirmation command for display) has been received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113. The mode of the fixed display effect according to the stop symbol indicated by the symbol determination flag is determined, the fixed display data table of the mode is set in the display data table buffer 233a, and Null data is written in the additional data table buffer 233b. The contents are cleared (S2914). Next, time data corresponding to the effect time of the final display is set in the time counter 233e (S2915), and the value of the pointer 233c is initialized to 0 (S2916). Then, the confirmation command flag is set to OFF (S2917), and after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S2918), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly used as the work RAM 233. (S2919), and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, when a display data table for variation is set in the display data table buffer 233a or the like, a confirmation command (confirmation for display) is sent from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 at the end of the effect. When the command) is received, the drawing content can be set so that the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Moreover, the effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be easily changed into a fixed display effect only by changing the display data table set to the display data table buffer 233b to a fixed display data table. And, compared with the case where the display contents are changed by starting another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not greatly loaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the processing of S2919 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, since the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is started from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, the variation based on the data table starts in the variation display data table. The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before is determined until a predetermined time elapses from this. In the task process (S2604), the stop symbol in the previous variation effect is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set in S2919 until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation. And the 3rd symbol which should be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information prescribed | regulated to the above-mentioned display data for a fluctuation | variation to the specified stop symbol. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, if the confirmation command flag is not on but off in the process of S2913 (S2913: No), the process proceeds to the process of S2920 shown in FIG. 38 to determine whether or not the confirmation display flag is on (S2920). ). If the confirmed display flag is on (S2920: Yes), the result of determination in the process of S2912 (S2912: Yes) means that the confirmed display effect has ended, so the confirmed display flag is set to off. Later (S2921), the display data table for demonstration is set in the display data table buffer 233a (S2922), and then the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the data display is set in the time counter 233e (S2923). Then, the pointer 233c is initialized to 0 (S2924), a demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S2925), and the V interrupt process is terminated.

  By this, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the display demonstration effect command indicating the start of the demonstration effect is not received by the end of the final display effect, automatically, The drawing content can be set so that the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  It should be noted that the branch condition of S2920: Yes is when the confirmed display effect is being performed. In this case, the content of the additional data table buffer 233b is cleared by the process of S2914. Therefore, in the process of S2922, the clear process of those data table buffers is omitted. Thereby, the processing load in the MPU 231 can be reduced.

  In the process of S2920, if the confirmation display flag is not on but off (S2920: No), it is then determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (S2926). If the demonstration display flag is on (S2926: Yes), the result of determination in the processing of S2912 (S2912: Yes) means that the demonstration effect has ended. Return to interrupt processing. In this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2926, when the demonstration display flag is not on but off (S2926: No), the result of the determination in the process of S2912 (S2912: Yes) means that the changing effect has ended. Therefore, if the confirmation command is not received even after a lapse of a predetermined time from the end of the variation effect, the display data table for variation corresponding to the variation effect is set in the display data table buffer 233a in order to start the restart effect. Accordingly, 1 is added to the restart timer counter initialized to 0 (S2927), and it is determined whether or not the value of the restart timer counter after the addition has reached a predetermined value (S2928).

  If the restart timer counter is not the predetermined value (S2928: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. When the restart timer counter is a predetermined value (S2928: Yes), the restart display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233a, and Null data is written in the additional data table buffer 233b, and the contents are changed. Clear (S2929). Then, time data corresponding to the effect time of the restart effect is set in the time counter 233e (S2930), the value of the pointer 233c is initialized to 0 (S2931), and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thereby, in the display control device 114, the confirmation command transmitted from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the third symbol is stopped and displayed with the end of the variation effect. When (display confirmation command) is not received, the drawing content can be set so that the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the restart effect is an effect of causing the third symbol display device 81 to display an image in which the third symbol is vibrated, so that the player uses the third symbol display device 81 to display the third symbol. If it is visually recognized that the third symbol vibrates and is displayed after the change of the stop is displayed, it can be recognized that the stop symbol is not fixed at that time.

  In addition, after the last drawing content prescribed | regulated by the restart display data table is expand | deployed, the drawing content is expand | deployed again from the head of the restart display data table by the above-mentioned pointer update process. Therefore, the restart effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a display confirmation command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 or a new display variation pattern command is received. Here, the restart effect is to display the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 in such a manner that the third symbol is vibrated (oscillated) around a predetermined position. In the restart display data table, the third symbol is displayed. Only the drawing contents necessary to display the screen at least once are defined. Then, by repeatedly expanding the drawing contents from the top of the restart display data table, a restart effect in which the third symbol is repeatedly vibrated is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thus, the restart effect is an effect that causes the 3rd symbol display device 81 to vibrate and display the 3rd symbol, so that the 3rd symbol is swung at least once in the restart display data table. Since it is only necessary to store the drawing contents necessary for display, the capacity required for storing the restart display data table can be reduced.

  If a display confirmation command is received from the audio lamp controller 113 while the restart effect is being performed by the restart display data table, the process of S2914 shown in FIG. 37 is performed, and the display data table buffer is displayed. A final display data table is set in 233a. Thus, even during the restart effect, the third symbol is stopped and displayed with the stop symbol indicated by the stop symbol discrimination flag in accordance with the reception of the display confirmation command, and the final symbol display device 81 displays the final display effect. Can be displayed.

  Further, when a display variation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113 while the restart effect is being performed by the restart display data table, the process of S2832 in FIG. A variation display data table is set in the data table buffer 233a, and a variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If a display demonstration command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 while the restart effect is being performed by the restart display data table, the process of S2821 in FIG. 33C is performed, and the display data is displayed. A display data table for demonstration is set in the table buffer 233a, and a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the restart effect, a confirmation command (display confirmation command) that should be received is not received even if a predetermined time elapses after the third symbol is stopped and displayed with the end of the variable effect. Since the effect is displayed in this case, there is a possibility that the confirmation command is not received even while the restart effect is displayed due to the influence of noise or malfunction. On the other hand, in this embodiment, if the display variation pattern command or the display demo command is received during the restart effect, the effect corresponding to the command can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Various effects in the third symbol display device 81 can be performed in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the details of the above drawing process (S2605), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, various sprite types constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2604) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information) , Color information, filter designation information), the drawing list shown in FIG. 16 is generated (S3001). That is, in the process of S3001, the address of the character storage area 234a in which image data of the sprite is stored is specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2604). Then, the parameters necessary for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified address. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprite that should be placed on the front side from the sprite that should be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprite after the rearrangement As the drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing the address of the character storage area 234a in which the image data of the sprite is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and drawing target buffer information specified by a drawing target buffer flag (not shown) are transmitted to the image controller (S3002). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag is 0, the first frame buffer provided in the video RAM 236 as drawing target buffer information includes information instructing to expand the drawn image. When the drawing target buffer flag is 0, the second frame buffer provided in the video RAM as drawing target buffer information includes information instructing to expand the drawn image.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and develops the image by overwriting the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the developed image in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the image drawn in one frame buffer is developed, and the drawing process and the display process are processed simultaneously in parallel. be able to.

  In the drawing process, after the process in S3002, the drawing target buffer flag is updated (S3003). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag is updated by inverting the value, that is, by setting the value to “1” if the value is “0” and setting it to “0” if it is “1”. Is called. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer and the second frame buffer of the video RAM 236 every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the drawing list is transmitted based on the V interrupt signal executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 31B) is executed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read, and image rendering is performed. When the processing and the display processing are executed, the second frame buffer is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing for the image for one frame is completed. A first frame buffer is designated as a frame buffer from which information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. . Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer. Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read are alternately designated for the first frame buffer and the second frame buffer every 20 milliseconds. As a result, the image display process for one frame can be continuously performed in units of 20 milliseconds while the image drawing process for one frame is being performed.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the variation effect is a big hit, the first accessory 87 is operated at an arbitrary timing when the variation effect is in the reach state. Thus, a single announcement is made indicating that the probability of winning a jackpot is 100%. In this case, after one notification is completed, in the variation effect, the effect selection image 81a for causing the player to select the effect pattern (reach pattern) to be displayed in advance is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this effect selection image 81a, thumbnail images corresponding to the three reach types are displayed, and “Please select a reach!” Is displayed in the center of the screen, so that the three reach types displayed can be selected. The reach type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the player.

  The player selects the reach type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from the three reach types displayed on the effect selection image 81a within the time displayed on the effect selection image. An image corresponding to the selected reach type can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, as described above, one notification by the first accessory 87 is performed at an arbitrary timing when the variation effect is in the reach state. That is, as shown in FIG. 11, one notification is made at an arbitrary timing in the normal reach period, the super reach period, and the special reach period. That is, the normal reach period to the special reach period can all be referred to as a single notification occurrence period. The timing at which one notification is made is determined by the display control device 114 by the one notification lottery counter 233f described later.

  On the other hand, as described above, the one-shot notification is a notice effect indicating that the fluctuating effect in which the one-shot notification is performed is a big hit with a probability of 100%. If the change pattern of the change effect has a long change time such as super reach or special reach, the following problem may occur if one notification is made at an early stage such as a normal reach period.

  In other words, if a single announcement is made, the player can recognize that it is a big hit with a probability of 100% in the variation production, but even if one announcement is made, the variation time of the variation production is not shortened. As such, the player must wait for the jackpot until the variable time indicated by the main controller 110 has elapsed. In addition, a super-reach pattern or a special reach pattern that is expected to generate a jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even though the jackpot is fixed until the jackpot is generated. There is a risk of arousal. In addition, since the super reach period and the special reach period generally require a long time to enhance the interest of the player, the player may be bored.

  On the other hand, in the present pachinko machine 10, when one notification is made during one variation effect, the effect selection image 81a is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the variation effect after the one notification, and the effect is displayed. The player can select the reach type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from the three reach types whose thumbnail images are displayed in the selected image 81a. As a result, when one announcement is made in one variation effect, the variation effect can be performed with the reach pattern corresponding to the reach type that the player wants to watch until the player wins the variation effect. Therefore, it is possible to show the reach pattern image corresponding to the reach type that the player wants to watch to the player who has been found to be a big hit in the variation production by one notification, so the player's interest is maintained. However, the game can be continued by the player.

  In general, various reach types are prepared for the pachinko machine 10, but there are not a few reach patterns with a very low probability of appearance in order for the player to feel a special feeling. By making it possible to select a reach pattern with a very low appearance probability in the effect selection image 81a displayed after one announcement is made, the player can be shown a reach pattern with a very low appearance probability. Can do. Therefore, a player who has been found to be a big hit in the fluctuating performance with a single announcement can experience a special feeling by seeing a reach pattern with a very low appearance probability, and can enhance the interest in the game .

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the three reach types to be displayed on the effect selection image 81a are required to display both the super reach pattern and the special reach pattern defined in the reach combination table shown in FIG. time, or time required for displaying the special reach pattern was described the case of selecting from among the following values for the remaining variation time T ₅ after displaying the effect selected image. In contrast, in the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment, the effect selected plurality of dividing the possible range as the residual variation time T ₅ after the image display, in advance determined plurality reach type should be selected for each range Three of the plurality of reach types determined for the range including the value of the remaining fluctuation time T5 are selected as reach types to be displayed on the effect selection image 81a.

  The pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment in that a reach selection table storage area 232d is provided in the program ROM 222232 of the display control device 114. The pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment is configured such that a part of the stop type command process (S2713), which is one process of the command determination process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, is the stop type in the first embodiment. It differs from the command. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp controller 113, and other processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114 are described in the first section. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  FIG. 43 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 according to the second embodiment. As described above, the display control device 114 in the second embodiment is provided with the reach selection table storage area 232d in the program ROM 232 in addition to the display control device 114 in the first embodiment.

The reach selection table storage area 232d is an area for storing a reach selection table. Reach selection table is dividing the possible range as the residual variation time T ₅ after the display effect selected image into a plurality, associates the reach type should be selected for each range table.

Here, the details of the reach selection table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the reach selection table stored in the reach selection table storage area 232d. Reach selection table shown in FIG. 44, the remaining variation time _{T 5} after the display effect select the image divided 10～19,20～29,30～39, ..., 100, in the range of, each Reach types that can be selected for display on the effect selection image 81a are associated with each of the ranges.

For example, for the range of the remaining variation time T ₅ after the display effect selection images 10 to 19, examination reach pattern, job search reach type such as Reach pattern associated, remaining variation time after the display effect selected image T ₅ Range of 20 to 29 is associated with reach types such as confession reach patterns and reach patterns. In addition, for 100 to the range of the remaining variation time T ₅ after the display presentation select the image to the development from the super reach to the Special Reach, lottery reach pattern + treasure reach pattern and lottery reach pattern + billionaire Reach pattern or the like reach of Types are associated.

When the MPU 231 decides to start the one notification in a certain variation effect, the MPU 231 is based on the variation time T ₀ of the variation effect and the time T ₁ from the start of the variation effect until the one notification is started. the remaining variation time T ₅ after the display effect selected image is calculated by the above equation (2). Then, referring to reach selection table, from the leech type associated for the range that contains the remaining fluctuation time T ₅ calculated, selects three reach type to be displayed in the effect selected image 81a.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45, details of the stop type command process (S2713) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing this stop type command processing. This stop type command process is a process executed when it is determined in the command determination process (S2602) that the display stop type command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, as in the first embodiment. The processing corresponding to the display stop type command is executed.

In the stop type command process in the second embodiment, the process of S3011 is executed instead of the process of S2850 in the stop type command process in the first embodiment, and the processes of S2841 to S2849 and S2851 to S2853 are the first The same processing as in the embodiment is performed. That is, stop type command processing in the second embodiment, the processing of S2849, and calculates the remaining variation time T ₅ after the display effect selected image after storing the remaining variation time memory 233 h, with reference to reach selection table, from the leech type associated for the range that contains the calculated remaining time varying T _5, it selects the three reach type to be displayed in the effect selection image 81a (S3011). Then, the process proceeds to S2851.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment, an effect selection image after displaying the possible range as the residual variation time T ₅ is divided into a plurality, in advance determined plurality reach type should be selected for each range Three of the plurality of reach types determined for the range including the value of the remaining fluctuation time T5 are selected as reach types to be displayed on the effect selection image 81a. Accordingly, as in the first embodiment, the three reach types displayed on the effect selection image 81a are displayed as both the super reach pattern and the special reach pattern defined in the reach combination table shown in FIG. duration, or time required for displaying the special reach pattern, as compared with the case of selecting from this effect selected image display after the remaining variation time T ₅ values following are effect selected image display after the value of the remaining variation time T _5, the time required for both display the super reach patterns and special reach pattern, or, since it is not necessary to perform a comparison of the time required for displaying the special reach pattern, demonstration selection The reach type displayed on the image 81a can be easily selected. In the first embodiment, the required time for displaying both the super reach pattern and the special reach pattern specified in the reach combination table, or the required time for displaying the special reach pattern is selected as the effect selection. reach type to be less than the value of the remaining variation time T ₅ after the display image, can occur many, when it comes to selecting the three reach type to be displayed in the effect selected image from the processing is complicated There is a risk. In contrast, in the second embodiment, an effect selecting a possible range as the residual variation time T ₅ after the image display is divided into a plurality, determined is limited to a predetermined number of previously reach type should be selected for each range Therefore, when three reach types to be displayed on the effect selection image are selected from a plurality of reach types, it is possible to prevent the processing from becoming complicated.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment can achieve the same effects as the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment based on the same components as the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment.

  Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 53. In the first embodiment and the second embodiment, each individual player selects a reach type to be displayed on the effect selection image 81a without considering the number of times each reach type has appeared for that player. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, for each player, the reach type displayed on the effect selection image 81a in consideration of the appearance frequency of each reach type that has appeared for that player. Is selected. Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with a focus on differences from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment. The same elements as those in the first embodiment and the second embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment is configured such that game results (logs) such as the number of fluctuations and the number of jackpots can be accumulated and recorded in an external (outside of the hall) server 500 for each player. Here, with reference to FIG. 46, a game system for recording a player's game result will be described. FIG. 46 is a block diagram showing the configuration of this gaming system.

  A gaming system that records a player's game results is based on the pachinko machine 10 provided in the hall, and the past games played by the player on the pachinko machine 10 by reading the two-dimensional code displayed on the pachinko machine 10. The mobile terminal 700 that receives cumulative information related to the results of the game and the mobile terminal 700 receives the cumulative information related to the results of the game played on the pachinko machine 10 from the mobile terminal 700 via the Internet 600, and records the cumulative information for each game result. The server 500 is configured.

  The pachinko machine 10 uses the cumulative value of the number of fluctuations, the number of jackpots, and the number of appearances of each reach type as cumulative information relating to the results of games played by the player from the past, and two-dimensional such as QR code (registered trademark). A code is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The portable terminal 700 has a function of reading a two-dimensional code, and extracts cumulative information related to the results of the game played by the player with the pachinko machine 10 from the read two-dimensional code. The portable terminal 700 transmits the accumulated information regarding the extracted game result to the server 500 via the Internet 600. Then, the server 500 records a cumulative value of the game result (the number of times of variation, the number of jackpots, the number of times of appearance for each reach type, etc.) based on the received cumulative information regarding the result of the game.

  Here, if this gaming system is a game result of the same player (strictly, if it is a game result transmitted from the portable terminal 700 having the same terminal unique number), it is a different platform of the same model. The game results that have been played can also be accumulated and recorded.

  Further, in response to a request from the mobile terminal 700, the server 500 transmits password information including accumulated game result information transmitted from the mobile terminal 700 in the past to the mobile terminal 700 via the Internet 600. The pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to input password information transmitted from the server 500 to the mobile terminal 700, and based on the input password information, accumulated information of game results of a player having the mobile terminal 700 is stored. , Can be deployed to the pachinko machine 10.

The pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to change various effects performed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the accumulated information of the game results of the player. Further, the pachinko machine 10 has three reach types to be displayed when one announcement is made and the effect selection image 81a is displayed, and the super reach pattern and the special reach pattern defined in the reach combination table shown in FIG. time required for both display of, or the time required for displaying the special reach pattern, in within the reach type value of the remaining variation time T ₅ after the display effect selected image is performed a game Based on the cumulative value of the number of appearances for each reach type in the player, the three reach types are selected in ascending order of the cumulative value.

  Thereby, a reach type that a player who has played a game has hardly or not seen can be selected and displayed on the effect selection image 81a. Therefore, the player can select one of the reach types and display the variation effect corresponding to the reach type on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the player can enjoy a special feeling by seeing the reach pattern corresponding to the reach type that has never been seen at all or not in the pachinko machine 10, and can increase the interest in the game.

  Next, the details of the server 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the server 500. The server 500 includes an MPU 221, a hard disk drive (HDD) 504, and a network interface 505, which are connected to each other via an input / output port 506.

  The MPU 501 is a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device, a ROM 502 that stores a boot program executed by the MPU 501, a RAM 503 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing various programs, In addition, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated.

  The HDD 504 is a non-volatile memory that stores various programs executed by the MPU 501 and various data used by the various programs in a rewritable manner. For example, user data 504 a is stored in the HDD 504.

  Here, the details of the user data 504a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of user data 504a.

  The user data 504a is associated with terminal-specific information of the mobile terminal 700 (for example, a UID (User Identifier), a telephone number, a MAC (Media Access Control) address, etc.), and the cumulative fluctuation count, cumulative jackpot count, or test reach reach appears The total number of appearances for each reach, such as the number of times, the number of job hunting reach appearances,...

  When the server 500 receives the accumulated information related to the game result from the mobile terminal 700, the received information is used as the accumulated information related to the game result of the player using the mobile terminal 700. For various accumulated values recorded in association with the unique information, the accumulated value of each game result (the number of changes, the number of jackpots, the number of appearances for each reach type) indicated by the received accumulated information is represented as user data 504a. To record. If the accumulated information of the game result corresponding to the mobile terminal 700 to which the information related to the game result is transmitted is not recorded in the user data 504a (that is, the terminal-specific information of the mobile terminal 700 is registered in the user data 504a). If the terminal-specific information of the mobile terminal 700 is newly registered in the user data 504a, the accumulated value of each game result transmitted from the mobile terminal 700 is directly associated with the terminal-specific information. Record in data 504a.

  When the mobile terminal 700 requests transmission of password information including information related to the accumulation of game results transmitted from the mobile terminal 700 in the past, the MPU 501 associates with the terminal-specific information of the mobile terminal 700. Based on the accumulated value of each game result recorded in the user data 504a, password information representing the accumulated value of each game result is generated, and the password information is transmitted to the portable terminal 700.

  The player inputs the password information received from the server 500 at the portable terminal 700 to the pachinko machine 10, and the accumulated value of each past game result of the player who uses the portable terminal 700 is then displayed on the pachinko machine 10. Can be entered.

  Returning to FIG. 47, the description will be continued. A network interface 505 is an interface for connecting the server 500 to the Internet 600. Transmission / reception with the portable terminal 700 is performed by the network interface 505 through the interface 600.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the detail of the display control apparatus 114 of the pachinko machine 10 in 3rd Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 49 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114.

  The difference between the display control device 114 in the third embodiment and the display control device 114 in the first embodiment is that the work RAM 233i has a log flag 233i, each reach type appearance count counter 233j, and a two-dimensional code display time counter 233k. It is a point which has further.

  The in-log flag 233i is a flag indicating whether or not to record a game result (log). When the flag is on, the game result is recorded. When the flag is off, the game result is not recorded. Indicates. The in-log flag 233i is initialized to off in the initial setting process (S2401 in FIG. 30) executed after the power is turned on. When the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the frame button 22 is operated when the logging flag 233i is off, the password input image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, When the password information is input, the accumulated value of each game result including the accumulated value of the number of appearances for each reach type indicated by the password information is expanded in the work RAM 233, and the in-log flag 233i is turned on. Once set, game result recording is started.

  On the other hand, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 and the in-logging flag 233i is on, if the frame operation button 22 is operated, the in-logging flag 233i is set to off and the game result is displayed. Recording ends. At this time, a two-dimensional code representing the cumulative value of each game result including the cumulative value of the number of appearances for each reach type is generated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The player causes the portable terminal 700 to read the two-dimensional code, and the accumulated value of each game result indicated by the two-dimensional code is transmitted to the server 500. The accumulated value of each game result is recorded in the user data 504a of the server 500.

  Each reach type appearance count counter 233j is a counter for counting the number of appearances of the corresponding reach type from the past for each reach type. When password information is input from the player and the in-log flag 233i is turned on, that is, when recording of the game result is started, the cumulative value of the number of appearances for each reach type indicated by the password information is: Each reach type appearance count counter 233j is expanded. When a super reach pattern or a special reach pattern appears during the variation effect, 1 is added to the number of appearances of the corresponding reach type. When the in-log flag 233i is turned off, that is, when the game result recording is ended, each game including the cumulative value of the number of appearances for each reach type recorded in each reach type appearance number counter 233j. A two-dimensional code representing the cumulative value of the result is generated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The two-dimensional code display time counter 233k is a counter for setting the time for displaying the two-dimensional code. When the display of the two-dimensional code is set, the time data for the time for displaying the two-dimensional code is set in the two-dimensional code display time counter 233k in units of 20 milliseconds. The two-dimensional display time counter 233k is decremented by 1 in the display setting process executed every 20 milliseconds while a value other than 0 is set. The two-dimensional code image continues to be developed on the third symbol display device 81 while the two-dimensional code display time counter 233k takes a value other than zero. As a result, the two-dimensional code is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for the time set by the two-dimensional code display time counter 233k.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 50, a log control process executed by the MPU 501 in the server 500 will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing this log control processing. The log control process is executed when there is a request from the portable terminal 700. In response to the request from the portable terminal 700, the log control process receives accumulated information of various game results transmitted from the portable terminal 700 and receives user data. The password information including the information related to the accumulation of game results transmitted from the mobile terminal 700 in the past, recorded in the user data 504a, is transmitted to the mobile terminal 700.

  In this log control process, first, it is determined whether or not there is a password issuance request (S3101). Obtaining (S3102), it is determined whether or not the obtained terminal-specific information is registered in the user data 504a (S3103).

  As a result, if the acquired terminal specific information is registered in the user data 504a (S3103: Yes), password information uniquely indicating the accumulated value of each game result stored in the user data 504a is set (S3104), If the acquired terminal specific information is not registered in the user data 504a (S3103: No), password information indicating that the accumulated values of each game result are all 0 is set (S3105). Then, the password information set by the process of S3104 or S3105 is transmitted to the portable terminal 700 that has requested the password issuance (S3106), and the logo control process ends.

  On the other hand, if there is no password issue request as a result of the process of S3101 (S3101: No), it is then determined whether or not there is an information registration request for requesting registration of accumulated information related to the game result from the portable terminal 700 ( S3107). As a result, if there is an information registration request (S3107: Yes), the terminal specific information of the portable terminal 700 that has made the information registration request is acquired (S3108), and the acquired terminal specific information is registered in the user data 504a. It is determined whether or not there is (S3109).

  As a result, if the acquired terminal specific information is not registered in the user data 504a (S3109: No), the acquired terminal specific information is registered in the user data 504a (S3110), and the process proceeds to S3111. If the acquired terminal specific information is registered in the user data 504a (S3108: Yes), the process proceeds to S3111 as it is.

  In the process of S3111, the cumulative value of each game result included in the information registration request is extracted, and the extracted cumulative value of each game result is stored in the user data 504a in association with the registered terminal-specific information for which the information registration request has been made. Recording is performed (S3111). Then, the log control process ends.

  Further, as a result of the processing in S3107, when there is no information registration request for requesting registration of accumulated information related to the game result from the portable terminal 700 (S3107: No), the log control processing is ended as it is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the details of the stop type command process (S2713) executed by the MPU 221 of the display control apparatus 114 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing this stop type command processing. This stop type command process is a process executed when it is determined in the command determination process (S2602) that the display stop type command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, as in the first embodiment. The processing corresponding to the display stop type command is executed.

In the stop type command process in the third embodiment, the process of S3021 is executed instead of the process of S2850 of the stop type command process in the first embodiment, and the processes of S2841 to S2849 and S2851 to S2853 are the first The same processing as in the embodiment is performed. That is, stop type command processing in the third embodiment, the processing of S2849, after storing the remaining time varying memory 233h calculates the remaining variation time T ₅ after the display effect selected image, Reach combination table shown in FIG. 14 The time required to display both the super reach pattern and the special reach pattern specified in the above, or the time required to display the special reach pattern is within the value of the remaining variation time T ₅ after the effect selection image is displayed. Among the reach types, the cumulative value of the number of appearances for each reach type in the player who is playing the game is determined from each reach type appearance number counter 233j, and the three reach types are selected in order of increasing appearance number. To do. Then, the process proceeds to S2851.

  Thereby, a reach type that a player who has played a game has hardly or not seen can be selected and displayed on the effect selection image 81a. Therefore, the player can select one of the reach types and display the variation effect corresponding to the reach type on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the player can enjoy a special feeling by seeing the reach pattern corresponding to the reach type that has never been seen at all or not in the pachinko machine 10, and can increase the interest in the game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the details of the display setting process (S2603) executed by the MPU 221 of the display control apparatus 114 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this display setting process. As in the first embodiment, this display setting process is a process executed in the V-interrupt process. Specifically, the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 are specifically described. It is something to identify.

  The difference between the display setting process in the third embodiment and the display setting process in the first embodiment is that after the branch of S2905: No or after the process of S2906 and before the process of S2909 is performed. It is a point which performs the process of S3301-S3303. Since the other processes performed in the display setting process of the third embodiment are all the same processes as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof is omitted here.

  In the process of S3301, it is determined whether or not the two-dimensional code display time counter 233k is 0 (S3301). If the two-dimensional code display time counter 233k is not 0 (S3301: No), the two-dimensional code image data generated by the frame button operation process (see FIG. 53) described later is developed (S3302). In the V interrupt process, in the task process executed after the display setting process (S2693), the sprites (display objects) constituting the two-dimensional code image are based on the developed two-dimensional code image data. In addition to specifying the type, various parameters necessary for drawing such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined for each sprite. Next, 1 is subtracted from the two-dimensional barcode display time counter 2233k (S3303), and the process proceeds to S2909.

  On the other hand, if the two-dimensional code display time counter 233k is 0 as a result of the process of S3301 (S3301; Yes), the process of S3302 and S3303 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2909.

  Accordingly, when two-dimensional code image data is generated in a frame button operation process (see FIG. 53) described later, the time for displaying the two-dimensional code set for the two-dimensional code time counter 233k elapses. Until then, the generated two-dimensional code image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the time has elapsed, the two-dimensional code image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is erased.

  Next, the details of the frame button operation process (S2906) executed by the MPU 221 of the display control apparatus 114 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing this frame button operation processing. This frame button operation process is a process executed in the display setting process when the frame button 22 is operated, as in the first embodiment.

  The frame button operation process in the third embodiment is different from the frame button operation process in the first embodiment in that the processes of S3401 to S3417 are added. In the frame button operation process in the third embodiment, after the process of S2964, it is determined whether or not a demo display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is on (S3401). As a result, if the demonstration display flag is off (S3401: No), the frame button operation process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the demonstration display flag is on (S3401: Yes), it is then determined whether the logging flag 233i is on (S3402). As a result, if the log flag 233i is off (S3402: No), the game result is not recorded, and it is then determined whether or not the password input image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 ( S3403). As a result, if the password input image is not displayed (S3403: No), a display data table for displaying the password input image on the third symbol display device 81 is set in the display data table buffer 233a (S3404). Time data corresponding to the password input image is set in the time counter 233e (S3405). Then, the pointer 233c is initialized to 0 (S3406), and the frame button operation process is terminated. Thus, when the frame button 22 is operated while the demonstration display effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the game result is not recorded and the password input image is not displayed. The password input screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, in the situation where the frame button 22 is operated while the demonstration display effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, when the password input image is displayed as a result of the processing of S3403 (S3403: Yes). Then, it is determined whether or not the selection of the character to be input has been determined by operating the frame button 22 (S3407). When the selection of the character to be input is determined (S3407: Yes), the determined character is stored (S3408), and the frame button operation process is terminated.

  If it is determined as a result of the processing in S3407 that the selection of the character to be input has not been determined (S3407: No), it is then determined whether or not the end of the input has been determined by operating the frame button 22. (S3409). If the end of input has not been determined (S3409: No), the frame button operation processing is ended as it is. If the end of input is determined (S3409: Yes), the cumulative value of the number of appearances of each reach type is expanded based on the password input by the processing of S3407 and S3408, and each expanded The cumulative value of the reach number of reach types is set in each reach type appearance number counter 233j (S3410). Next, the display data table for the demonstration effect is set in the display data table buffer 233a (S3411), and the time data corresponding to the demonstration effect is set in the time counter 233e (S3412). Further, the pointer 233c is initialized to 0, the logging flag 233i is set to ON (S3413), and the frame button operation processing is ended.

  That is, when the input of the password is completed, the cumulative value of the number of appearances of each reach type indicated by the password is set in each reach type appearance number counter 233j, and the log flag 233i is turned on, so that the game result Recording starts. The demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined by the processing of S3402 that the in-log flag 233i is turned on (S3402: Yes), the game result is recorded, so first from each reach type appearance count counter 233j, Is read out (S3414). Next, a two-dimensional code indicating at least the accumulated value of the number of appearances of each read type and the address of the server 500 is generated (S3415). Then, time data for a time for displaying the two-dimensional code is set in the two-dimensional code display time counter 233k (S3416). Thereafter, each reach type appearance count counter is initialized to 0, the logging flag 233i is set to OFF (S3417), and the frame button operation processing is terminated.

  Thus, when the frame button 22 is operated while the demonstration display effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, if the game result is recorded, each reach type obtained by the recording is recorded. Can be generated, and the generated two-dimensional code can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. By reading this two-dimensional code, the portable terminal 700 can transmit a cumulative value of each game result such as a cumulative value of the number of appearances of each reach type to the server 500 specified by an address included in the two-dimensional code. The server 500 records the cumulative value of each received game result.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the three reach types displayed when one announcement is made and the effect selection image 81a is displayed are displayed in the reach combination table shown in FIG. The time required to display both the super reach pattern and the special reach pattern specified in the above, or the time required to display the special reach pattern is within the value of the remaining variation time T ₅ after the presentation selection image is displayed. Among the reach types, based on the cumulative value of the number of appearances for each reach type in the player who is playing the game, the three reach types are selected in descending order of the cumulative value.

  Thereby, a reach type that a player who has played a game has hardly or not seen can be selected and displayed on the effect selection image 81a. Therefore, the player can select one of the reach types and display the variation effect corresponding to the reach type on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the player can enjoy a special feeling by seeing the reach pattern corresponding to the reach type that has hardly or never been seen in the pachinko machine 10 and can enhance the interest in the game.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in 3rd Embodiment can have the same effect as the pachinko machine 10 in 1st Embodiment based on the component same as the pachinko machine 10 in 1st Embodiment.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

For example, in each embodiment, a part or a plurality of parts of the configuration of the other embodiments are added to the embodiment or replaced with a part or a plurality of parts of the configuration of the embodiment. The embodiment may be modified and configured. As an example, the gaming system of the third embodiment may be configured using the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment. In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when the announcement selection image 81a is displayed after one notification is made and the reach type having the reach pattern that the player wants to see can be selected from the three reach types. , by dividing the possible range as the residual variation time T ₅ after the display effect selected image into a plurality, in advance, a reach type should be selected for each range in advance determined plurality, it contains the value of the remaining variable time T5 Three of the plurality of reach types determined for the range are selected as reach types to be displayed on the effect selection image 81a. Here, when there are four or more reach types determined for the range including the value of the remaining variation time T5, an appearance of each reach type among the reach types among the reach types is shown. Based on the cumulative value of the number of times, three reach types may be selected in order from the smallest cumulative value. Thereby, a reach type that a player who has played a game has hardly or not seen can be selected and displayed on the effect selection image 81a. Therefore, the player can select one of the reach types and display the variation effect corresponding to the reach type on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the player can enjoy a special feeling by seeing the reach pattern corresponding to the reach type that has hardly or not been seen in the pachinko machine 10, and can enhance the interest in the game.

  Moreover, the numerical value quoted in each said embodiment is an example, and it is naturally possible to employ | adopt another numerical value.

  In each said embodiment, although the case where one notification was performed by operating the 1st accessory 87 was demonstrated, it is not restricted to this. In the middle of the fluctuating production, a specific movable accessory is operated, a specific image is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device or another liquid crystal display device, a specific sound is output, or a lamp is displayed in a specific mode. The player may be informed that the variation effect is a big hit with a probability of 100% by executing light emission / flashing or a combination thereof. In addition, any means may be used as a means for making a single announcement as long as it notifies the player that, as a result of the fluctuation effect, the game will be a big hit with a probability of 100%.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, a case has been described where the one-shot notification is performed at an arbitrary timing when the fluctuating effect is in the reach state, but is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, one notification may be performed at an arbitrary timing including a high-speed fluctuation period as a timing at which one notification is performed. Further, if a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation effect, one notification may be made at an arbitrary timing. Moreover, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation effect, one notification may not be performed.

In the above embodiment, the timing at which one notification is made is not particularly taken into consideration, and when one notification is made, the effect selection image 81a is displayed on the third symbol display device, and the subsequent change effect is made. Although the case where the player selects the reach type to be displayed has been described, taking into account the timing at which one notification is made, for example, the first time has elapsed since the start of the variation effect for one notification When performed later, the effect selection image 81 a may be hidden on the third symbol display device 81. Also, when performing one shot announcement, if the remaining time varying T ₃ after the one shot announcement becomes less than the second time, even hide effect selected image 81a on the third symbol display device 81 good to, when a an effect selected image 81a performs one shot announcement was displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the remaining variation time T ₅ after displaying the effect selected image becomes less third time In such a case, the effect selection image 81a may be hidden on the third symbol display device 81. In this case, than short remaining time varying T ₅ after the display effect selected image, the effect selected image 81a in this case is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a reach type you want to see the player Even if the selection is made, the variation effect for that reach type ends in a short time, and the player may be disappointed. On the other hand, in such a case, the effect selection image 81a is not displayed on the third symbol refueling device 81, so that the variation effect in the reach type selected by the player is performed at least for a certain period of time. Can be made. Therefore, the interest of the player can be enhanced.

  In the third embodiment, for each player, the cumulative value of the number of appearances of each reach type that has appeared in the player is recorded by the external (outside of the hall) server 700, and each player's appearance is recorded. Although the case where three reach types to be displayed on the effect selection image 81a are selected based on the cumulative value of the number of appearances of reach types has been described, the cumulative value of the number of times of appearance of each reach type is not necessarily stored in the external server 700. There is no need to let them. For example, an accumulated value of the number of appearances of each reach type that appears in each player may be recorded for each player in a management computer (hall computer) provided in the hall. Further, the accumulated value of the number of appearances of each reach type that appears in the player may be recorded in various memory media such as an IC card and a magnetic card that can be owned for each player.

  In each of the above embodiments, the image controller 237 transmits a V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at every image display interval (one 20 ms in each of the above embodiments) for completing the drawing process. However, the image controller 237 may transmit the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 every time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display an image of one frame. The third symbol display device 81 is driven so that images for one frame are always displayed at regular time intervals (20 millisecond intervals). By transmitting, it is possible to keep accurate even without measuring the time interval.

  In each of the embodiments described above, the image controller 237 specifies a frame buffer in which a rendered image is to be developed based on the rendering target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231, and an image first developed from the other frame buffer. The case where information is read out and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and every time the image controller 237 receives a drawing list, a frame in which the drawn image is to be developed. Alternatively, the buffers may be alternately selected, and the previously developed image information may be read from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. Each time the image controller 237 transmits image information for one frame to the third symbol display device 81, the image controller outputs the image information to the third symbol display device 81 and the frame buffer in which the drawn image is to be developed. The frame buffer to be replaced may be replaced.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, a case has been described in which the demonstration effect is to stop and display the third symbol composed of the main symbols not numbered from “0” to “9”. Alternatively, a third symbol composed of a main symbol with numbers or a main symbol without numbers may be stopped and displayed in a semi-transparent state. Alternatively, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Moreover, you may display a character and back image completely different from the 3rd pattern and back image used by a variable display.

  In each of the embodiments described above, the display data table has been described with respect to the case where the content (drawing content) of the image to be drawn at that time is specified corresponding to the time represented by 20 milliseconds as one unit. The display contents are not limited to those described above, and any display contents may be defined as long as they are defined at predetermined time intervals. This predetermined time interval may be set in accordance with the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, when the third symbol display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 is 1/30 second. Since an image of one frame is displayed every time, the display data table may define display contents every 1/30 second interval.

  Further, in the display data table, the sprite type to be drawn specified at predetermined time intervals is not indicated, but the address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored. May be defined. In the display control device 114, image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is read from the character ROM 234. Therefore, the character ROM 234 stores image data of the sprite type in association with each sprite type. I manage the address. Therefore, in the display data table, if the address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the sprite type is defined as the display content defined at each predetermined time interval, the sprite is associated with each sprite type. Since it is not necessary to manage both the information for specifying the address and the address of the character ROM 234, the processing load can be reduced.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, when the variation effect is executed, the case where the high-speed variation that scrolls all the symbols Z1 to Z3 so fast that the player cannot visually recognize the high-speed variation is described. Thus, all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed in a reduced size so that they cannot be visually recognized, or all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow noise-like images in which many white dots are randomly displayed.

  In each of the above embodiments, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or the special figure 2 reserved series counter 223b is decreased by 1 ( Although description has been given of the case of S2107 to S2111 in FIG. 28, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, in the fluctuation process (see FIG. 20) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the special chart of the main controller 110 subtracted in accordance with the change pattern command being set by the fluctuation start process (S1308). The special figure is set so that the value (NA) of the reserved ball number counter 203d or the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (see S1310 and S1305 in FIG. 20) is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113. 1 hold ball number command or special figure 2 hold ball number command is set, and the special figure 1 hold ball number command or special figure 2 hold ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 together with the transmission of the variation pattern command. It may be transmitted to the device 113. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can more accurately grasp the number of balls held by the main control device 110. In this case, S2107 to S2111 in FIG. 28 are omitted.

  In each of the above embodiments, each command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and the display instruction is given from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. The command may be directly transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114. In addition, an audio lamp control device is connected to the display control device, and a command for instructing the output of each sound and lighting of the lamp from the display control device, and an accessory operation start command for instructing the start of operation of the accessory, You may comprise so that it may transmit to a control apparatus. At this time, the display control device determines a detailed variation pattern based on the command received directly from the main control device 110, and based on the detailed variation pattern, from the display control device to the sound lamp control device, You may transmit the command which instruct | indicates the output of each audio | voice and lighting of a lamp | ramp, and the accessory operation start command which instruct | indicates the operation | movement start of a movable accessory. Furthermore, the sound lamp control device and the display control device may be configured as one control device. By using these as one control device, the number of parts can be reduced, and the cost increase of the pachinko machine can be suppressed.

  When the sound lamp control device and the display control device are configured as one control device, a flag is generated instead of the command generated by the sound lamp control device 113 and notified to the display control device 114, and based on the flag, The display data table may be set in the display data table buffer 233a, or various image data such as a warning image may be generated. Further, instead of the display type command and the accessory operation start command generated by the display control device 114 and notified to the sound lamp control device 113, a display type flag and an accessory operation start flag are generated, and based on the display type flag. Then, the audio data to be reproduced may be read out from the ROM 222 and reproduced, or the movable accessory indicated by the accessory action start flag is indicated by the accessory action start flag based on the accessory action start flag. You may drive the solenoid provided in the movable accessory, a motor, etc. so that it may operate in a mode.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the winning at the first entrance 64, the winning at the second entrance 640, and the passage of the ball to the through gate 67 are each held up to four times. However, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). In addition, in some parts of the third symbol display device 81, the number of reserved balls for the fluctuating effect based on the winning at the first entrance 64 and the number of reserved balls for the fluctuating effect based on the winning at the second entrance 640 are: The display may be displayed in numbers or in a form (for example, color or lighting pattern) that is different from the area divided into four by the number of reserved balls. The lamp may be separated from the first symbol display device 37. A light emitting member such as a light emitting member may be provided, and the number of reserved balls may be notified by the light emitting member.

  In addition, as shown in each of the above embodiments, the fluctuating effect that is a kind of dynamic display is not limited to the one that scrolls the symbol as identification information in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It may be performed by moving and displaying the symbols along a predetermined path such as a horizontal direction or an L-shape. In addition, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the display of variation of the symbol. For example, one or a plurality of characters may be displayed in various manners together with the symbol or displayed in a variety of manners separately from the symbol. The effect display etc. which are displayed are also included. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition that a special ball is awarded to the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for ball launching. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

  Acquisition means for acquiring random information triggered by establishment of a predetermined start condition, aspect selection means for selecting an aspect of dynamic display of identification information based on information acquired by the acquisition means, and aspect selection means Dynamic display executing means for executing dynamic display of identification information based on the aspect selected by In the gaming machine that gives a predetermined game value to the player when issued, when the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, the identification information by the dynamic display execution means Determining means for determining whether or not to activate the notification means for notifying that the predetermined identification information appears, and operating the notification means by the determination means. Based on the determination, during the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display execution means, the notification means for operating the notification means, and the notification means is operated by the notification operation means. And a changing means for changing a mode of dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means based on an operation of the operating means by the player. A1.

  According to the gaming machine A1, random information is acquired by the acquisition unit triggered by the establishment of a predetermined instruction condition, and the mode of dynamic display of identification information is selected by the mode selection unit based on the acquired information. Is done. Based on the mode selected by the mode selection means, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means. In the dynamic display of the identification information, when predetermined identification information appears, a predetermined game value is given to the player. In addition, when the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means, the predetermined identification information appears during execution of the dynamic display of the identification information. It is determined by the determining means whether to operate the notifying means for notifying that. When it is determined by the determining means that the notifying means is activated, the notifying means is operated by the notifying operating means during the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display executing means. As a result, during the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information by the operation of the notification means, the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, and a predetermined game value is given to the player. I can inform you. On the other hand, if it is found that the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information and the predetermined game value is given during execution of the dynamic display of the identification information, the player Expect to finish early on the dynamic display of information. However, generally, when predetermined identification information appears, dynamic display of identification information tends to be performed for a long time. On the other hand, after the notification means is operated by the notification operation means, the mode of dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means is changed based on the operation of the operation means by the player. Changed by means. Thereby, the aspect of the dynamic display of identification information can be changed to the aspect which a player desires. Therefore, even if the player is found to be given a predetermined game value as a result of the dynamic display of the identification information being executed, the player is bored with the dynamic display of the identification information. It has the effect of letting you see it until the end.

  In the gaming machine A1, after the notification means is operated by the notification operation means, a calculation means for calculating a time during which the dynamic display of the identification information can be executed in a changed mode, and the calculation means Among the modes in which the identification information can be dynamically displayed within the time, in order from the mode in which the difference between the time calculated by the calculation unit and the time required for the dynamic display of the identification information in that mode is small, Selecting means for selecting a predetermined number of modes, wherein the changing means operates the identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means after the notification means is operated by the notification operating means. The gaming machine A2 is characterized in that the mode of the target display is changed based on the operation of the operating means by the player from among the predetermined number of modes selected by the selecting means.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are achieved. In other words, after the notifying means is operated by the notifying operation means, the time for which the dynamic display of the identification information can be executed in the changed mode is calculated by the calculating means. Among the modes in which the identification information can be dynamically displayed within the calculated time, in order from the mode in which the difference between the calculated time and the time required for the dynamic display of the identification information in the mode is small, A predetermined number of modes are selected by the selection means. Then, after the notifying means is operated by the notifying operation means, the dynamic display mode of the identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means is selected from the predetermined number of modes selected by the selecting means. Based on the operation of the operation means, the change means changes. Thereby, after the aspect of the dynamic display of the identification information can be changed, the time from the actual change to the dynamic display of the identification information in the aspect desired by the player can be shortened. Therefore, since the switching of the dynamic display mode of the identification information can be performed at a good tempo, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from being delayed due to the switching.

  In the gaming machine A1, after the notification means is operated by the notification operation means, a calculation means for calculating a time during which the dynamic display of the identification information can be executed in a changed mode, and the calculation means A selection means for selecting a predetermined number of modes in order from a mode in which the probability that dynamic display of identification information is performed in the mode is possible among modes in which the identification information can be dynamically displayed in time. The changing means has selected the dynamic display mode of the identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means by the selecting means after the notification means is operated by the notification operating means. A gaming machine B1 which is changed based on the operation of the operating means by the player from a predetermined number of modes.

  According to the gaming machine B1, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are achieved. In other words, after the notifying means is operated by the notifying operation means, the time for which the dynamic display of the identification information can be executed in the changed mode is calculated by the calculating means. Among the modes in which the identification information can be dynamically displayed within the calculated time, a predetermined number of modes are selected by the selection unit in order from the mode in which the probability that the dynamic display of the identification information is performed in the mode is low. The Then, after the notifying means is operated by the notifying operation means, the dynamic display mode of the identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means is selected from the predetermined number of modes selected by the selecting means. Based on the operation of the operation means, the change means changes. This allows the player to select an aspect with a low probability of being executed as dynamic display of identification information. Therefore, by showing the player the dynamic display of the identification information in that mode, there is an effect that a special feeling can be tasted and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine A1, after the notification means is operated by the notification operation means, a calculation means for calculating a time during which the dynamic display of the identification information can be executed in a changed mode, and the calculation means A selection means for selecting a predetermined number of modes in order from a mode in which the number of times the dynamic display of the identification information is performed in the mode among the modes in which the dynamic display of the identification information can be performed within the time; The changing means is selected by the selecting means in a dynamic display mode of the identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means after the notifying means is operated by the notification operating means. A gaming machine C1 which is changed based on the operation of the operating means by the player from a predetermined number of modes.

  According to the gaming machine C1, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are achieved. In other words, after the notifying means is operated by the notifying operation means, the time for which the dynamic display of the identification information can be executed in the changed mode is calculated by the calculating means. Among the modes in which the identification information can be dynamically displayed within the calculated time, a predetermined number of modes are selected by the selection unit in order from the mode in which the number of times the dynamic display of the identification information is performed in the mode. Is done. Then, after the notifying means is operated by the notifying operation means, the dynamic display mode of the identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means is selected from the predetermined number of modes selected by the selecting means. Based on the operation of the operation means, the change means changes. Thereby, a player can be made to select the aspect with low frequency | count performed as dynamic display of identification information. Therefore, by showing the player the dynamic display of the identification information in that mode, there is an effect that a special feeling can be tasted and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine C1, the number of times the identification information is dynamically displayed in the past game is acquired for each aspect of the dynamic display of the identification information for the player who plays the game on the gaming machine. The selection means comprises the number acquisition means, and the selection means is capable of dynamically displaying the identification information within the time calculated by the calculation means based on the number of times acquired by the number acquisition means. A gaming machine C2 characterized in that a predetermined number of modes are selected in order from the mode in which the number of times the dynamic display of identification information is performed in that mode for the player.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine C1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the number of times the dynamic display of the identification information in the past game is executed by the number acquisition means in the past game for each mode of the dynamic display of the identification information for the player playing the game on the gaming machine. The Then, among the modes in which the identification information can be dynamically displayed within the time calculated by the calculation means, based on the number of times acquired by the number acquisition means, the player can dynamically identify the identification information in that mode. A predetermined number of modes are selected by the selection unit in order from the mode in which the number of times of display is low. This allows the player who is playing the game to select a mode in which the number of times of execution as the dynamic display of the identification information can be selected, so that the player can be shown the dynamic display of the identification information in the mode he wanted to see. Can do. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make the player feel more special and to enhance the interest in the game.

  In the gaming machine A1, after the notification means is operated by the notification operation means, a calculation means for calculating a time during which the dynamic display of the identification information can be executed in a changed manner, and the calculation means can calculate the time. A storage unit that stores in advance a dynamic display mode of identification information to be selected in association with time, and a dynamic display of the identification information to be selected that is associated with the time calculated by the calculation unit. A reading unit that reads out the mode from the storage unit, and the changing unit is configured to change the identification information that is being executed by the dynamic display executing unit after the notification unit is operated by the notification operating unit. The dynamic display mode is changed based on the operation of the operation unit by the player from among the dynamic display modes of the identification information to be selected read from the reading unit. Gaming machine D1 characterized and.

  According to the gaming machine D1, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are achieved. In other words, after the notifying means is operated by the notifying operation means, the time for which the dynamic display of the identification information can be executed in the changed mode is calculated by the calculating means. The storage means stores in advance a dynamic display mode of identification information to be selected in association with the time that can be calculated by the calculation means. Here, the dynamic display mode of the identification information to be selected, which is associated with the time calculated by the calculation unit, is read from the storage unit by the reading unit. Then, after the notification means is operated by the notification operation means, the dynamic display mode of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means is the dynamic of the identification information to be selected read from the reading means. The display is changed by the changing unit based on the operation of the operating unit by the player. Since the aspect of the dynamic display of the identification information to be selected is stored in the storage unit in advance, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the processing from being complicated in the selection.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1, A2, B1, C1, C2, and D1, the changing unit is configured to operate the operation unit by the player for at least a first period after the notification unit is operated by the notification operation unit. An operation is accepted, and the dynamic display mode of the identification information being executed by the dynamic display execution means is changed, and the calculation means is activated by the notification means. The gaming machine E1 is characterized in that a time during which the dynamic display of the identification information can be executed in a changed manner is calculated after the first period is subtracted.

  According to the gaming machine E1, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1, A2, B1, C1, C2, and D1, the following effects are produced. That is, after the notification means is operated by the notification operation means, the operation of the operation means by the player is accepted by the change means for at least the first period, and the dynamic of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means is performed. The display mode is changed. Then, after the notifying means is activated by the notifying actuating means calculated by the calculating means, the time during which the dynamic display of the identification information can be executed in the changed mode is calculated after the first period is subtracted. Is done. Thereby, at least in the first period, the player can be operated to change the mode of the dynamic display of the identification information. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily select a desired mode.

  In any of the gaming machines A1, A2, B1, C1, C2, D1, and E1, after the notification means is operated by the notification operation means, the identification information can be dynamically displayed in a changed manner. A mode of dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means after the notification means is operated by the notification means by the calculation means for calculating time and the change means, When it is changed based on the operation of the operating means by the player, when the time required to execute the dynamic display of the identification information in the changed mode is shorter than the time calculated by the calculating means, A gaming machine E2 comprising switching display executing means for performing display indicating switching of modes for the time corresponding to the difference.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1, A2, B1, C1, C2, D1, and E1, the following effects are produced. In other words, after the notifying means is operated by the notifying operation means, the time for which the dynamic display of the identification information can be executed in the changed mode is calculated by the calculating means. Then, after the notifying means is operated by the notifying operation means by the changing means, the dynamic display mode of the identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means is changed based on the operation of the operating means by the player. If the time required for executing the dynamic display of the identification information in the mode after the change is shorter than the time calculated by the calculation means, the display showing the mode switching by the difference time Is performed by the switching display means. Thereby, there is an effect that the switching to the dynamic display of the identification information in a mode changed by the changing unit can be smoothly performed.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1, A2, B1, C1, C2, D1, E1, and E2, after the informing means is operated by the informing operation means, the identification information is dynamically displayed in a changed manner. A calculation means for calculating a possible time; and a selection means for selecting a predetermined number of aspects among the aspects in which the identification information can be dynamically displayed within the time calculated by the calculation means, When the time required for executing the dynamic display of the identification information in the mode selected by the selecting means is shorter than the time calculated by the calculating means, the changing means is the player for the difference time. The gaming machine E3 is characterized in that the reception of the operation of the operation means by the operation can be extended to change the dynamic display mode of the identification information being executed by the dynamic display execution means.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1, A2, B1, C1, C2, D1, E1, and E2, the following effects are produced. That is, after the notifying means is operated by the notifying operation means, a time during which the dynamic display of the identification information can be executed in the changed mode is calculated by the calculating means, and within the calculated time, Of the modes that can be displayed, a predetermined number of modes are selected by the selection means. When the time required for executing the dynamic display of the identification information in the mode selected by the selection means is shorter than the time calculated by the calculation means, the player is changed by the change means for the difference time. The acceptance of the operation of the operation means by the above is extended, and the dynamic display mode of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means can be changed. Thereby, in order to change the aspect of the dynamic display of the identification information for the player, it is possible to lengthen the time for operating the operation means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily select a desired mode.

  One of the gaming machines A1, A2, B1, C1, C2, D1, E1 to E3, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  One of the gaming machines A1, A2, B1, C1, C2, D1, E1 to E3, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  One of the gaming machines A1, A2, B1, C1, C2, D1, E1 to E3, wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
22 Frame button (operation means)
81 3rd symbol display device (dynamic display executing means)
87 1st character (notification means)
113 Sound lamp control device (informing differential means)
232d Reach selection table storage area (storage means)
S1105 Start winning process (acquisition means)
S1308 Fluctuation start processing (mode selection means)
S2846 (Determination means)
S2849 (Calculation means)
S2850 (selection means)
S2987 (switching display execution means)
S2988 (Change means)
S3011 (reading means)
S3201 (selection means)
S3410 (Number of times acquisition means)

Claims (2)

Acquisition means for acquiring random information triggered by establishment of a predetermined start condition, aspect selection means for selecting an aspect of dynamic display of identification information based on information acquired by the acquisition means, and aspect selection means Dynamic display executing means for executing dynamic display of identification information based on the mode selected by the above, and in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means, predetermined identification information is present. In a gaming machine that gives a predetermined game value to a player when issued,
When the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, the predetermined identification information appears during execution of the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display execution means. Determining means for determining whether to activate a notification means for notifying
A notification actuating means for actuating the notifying means during the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display executing means based on the fact that the determining means has decided to actuate the notifying means;
A change in which a mode of dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means is changed based on an operation of the operating means by a player after the notification means is operated by the notification operating means. And a gaming machine. Calculating means for calculating a time during which the dynamic display of the identification information can be executed in a changed manner after the notification means is operated by the notification operation means;
Among the modes in which the identification information can be dynamically displayed within the time calculated by the calculation means, a predetermined number of modes are selected in order from the mode in which the probability that the identification information is dynamically displayed in that mode is low. And a selection means for
The changing means is configured to select a dynamic display mode of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means after the notification means is operated by the notification operation means. 2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is changed based on an operation of the operating means by a player from among a number of modes.

Images